~ -~ :, ~'

MacintOSh"' Macintosh II

-
)
- . ® MacintoshTMMacintosh
I
I ,
II
~
l

-
'

f""""!I

~
t

~
~

!"'°"I

~
I

I
WAPPLE COMPUTER, INC. CompuServe is a registered
trademark of CompuServe
This manual and the software Corp.
described in it are copyrighted,
with all rights reserved. Under
the copyright laws, this manual Dow Jones News/Retrieval is a
or the software may not be registered trademark of Dow
copied, in whole or part, Jones & Company, Inc.
without written consent of
Apple, except in the normal use
ITC Garamond, ITC Avant
of the software or to make a Garde Gothic, and ITC Zapf
backup copy of the software. Dingbats are registered
The same proprietary and
trademarks of International
copyright notices must be
Typeface Corporation.
affixed to any permitted copies
as were affixed to the original.
This exception does not allow Microsoft and MS/DOS are
copies to be made for others, trademarks of Microsoft
whether or not sold, but all of Corporation.
the material purchased (with all
backup copies) may be sold,
given, or loaned to another NuBus is a trademark of Texas
person. Under the law, copying Instruments Incorporated.
includes translating into
another language or format. POSTSCRIPT is a trademark of
You may use the software on any Adobe Systems Incorporated.
computer owned by you, but
extra copies cannot be made for The Source is a registered
this purpose. service mark of Source
© Apple Computer, Inc., 1986
20525 Mariani Ave.
Cupertino, California 95014
( 408) 996-1010
Telecomputing Corporation, a
subsidiary of the Reader's
Digest Association, Inc.

UNIX is a registered trademark

,
of AT&T Company.
Apple, the Apple logo,
Apple Care, AppleLink,
AppleTalk, ImageWriter, Simultaneously published in the
LaserWriter, and MacWrite are United States and Canada.
registered trademarks of Apple
Computer, Inc.

AppleColor, Apple DeskTop

Bus, AppleShare, MacDraw,
Macintosh, MacPaint,
MacProject, and MacTerminal
are trademarks of Apple
Computer, Inc. ~
, I
.ri
Contents

Radio and television Interference x

Figures and tables xi

Preface Welcome to Macintosh II xv

How to use this manual xvi
For the beginner xvii
After the tutorial xvii
For the already initiated xviii
For the advanced user xviii
User groups xix

Chapter 1 Setting Up Your Macintosh II

Unpacking 2
Important safety instructions 5
Plugging it all together 6
Connecting the power cord 6
Connecting the monitor 7
Installing the video card in the main unit 8
Connecting the video cable 12
Connecting the monitor's power cord 13
Connecting the mouse and the keyboard 14
Why two connectors? 16
Ready to go? 17
Other devices 18
Internal h ard disk users 19
Let's get started! 19

Chapter 2 Learning About Your Macintosh II 21

Training disk or tutorial? 22
The training disk 23
Problems starting up? 25
What to do when you're finished 26

iii
 The tutorial 27
Mouse basics 29
Moving the pointe r by moving the mouse 30
Selecting by clicking an icon 31
Dragging an icon 32
Selecting and choosing 34
Selecting the System Tools icon 34
Pulling down a menu 34
Choosing a command from a menu 35
Manipulating windows 37
Changing the size of a window 37
Moving a window 39
Opening another Icon 40
Making a window active 40
Opening othe r icons 43
Closing a window 44
Using the scroll bars to see more 4 5
Using applications 47
Sta rling an application 48
Creating a new document 49
Saving your work on a disk 50
Editing text 52
Saving a docume nt with a difTerent name 56
Organizing docume nts 58
Using folders 58
Nesting folde rs 61
Working in the hierarchical file system 64
Selecting more than one icon 70
n
Changing your view 73
Reading Read Me docume nts 74
Using a desk accessory 76
Before you go 77
Updating startup disks 77
Starting your own work 79

Chapter 3 Your Macintosh II Step by Step 81

How to use this chapter 82
Summary of mouse techniques 84
Handling windows 86
Scro lling 88
Se lecting icons 90
Editing text 92

n
iv Contents
n
 Using desk accessories 95
Using the Chooser 96
Using the Control Panel 98
Using Find File 107
Using the Scrapbook 111
Managing documents, folders, and applicalions 113
Creating and opening documents 114
Using folders 115
Renaming 117
Copying or moving a document, folder, or application 118
Removing or recovering a document, folder, or
applicalion 120
Locking a document or application 121
Printing 122
Using the MiniFinder 125
Managing documents within an application 127
Managing disks 133
Initializing a 3.5-inch disk 134
Ejecting a disk 136
Creating a startup disk 137
Copying an entire disk 138
Using the Installer 139

Chapter4 Macintosh II Reference 143

What Macintosh II is: its parts 144
Where does your information go? 145
The keyboard 146
Character keys 147
Numeric keys 147
Arrow keys 147
Special keys 148
Power on 148
Esc 148
Tab 148
Control 148
Shift 148
Caps Lock 148
Option 149
Apple 150
Enter 150
Clear 150
Delete 151
Return 151

Contents v
 ~I
,
I

Disks 151
Initializing disks 151 ~
Locked disks 153 I
Names of disks and documents 154
Startup disks 155
If you don't have a hard disk ... 156
Customizing startup disks 156
The current startup disk 157
Switching startup disks 157
Arranging your work on disks efficiently 158
Windows 159
The Clipboard: Cutting and pasting 160
Dialog boxes 161
Desk accessories 162
~
Alarm Clock 163 1.

Calculator 164
Chooser 164
~
Control Panel 165 I

Monitors and the Control Panel 166

Find File 167
Key Caps 168 ..-i
I
' l
Note Pad 169
Scrapbook 169
TeachText 170
Finder reference 171
What the Finder manages 172
Applications and documents 172
Disks 172
Ejected disks 172
The desktop 173
The Trash 174
Folders 174
The hierarchical file system 175 ....I I

Within applications 176 I

Selecting icons 178

Dragging icons 178

vi Contents
r Appendix A Working With Hard Disks 226
Using the hard disk installer 227
Initializing your hard disk 227
Other hard disk installer functions 230
Update 230
Test 231
Drive 231
Installing system software 232
Getting the most out of your hard disk 233
Adding SCSI terminators 234
Troubleshooting your hard disk 238

Appendix B Macintosh II Specifications 240

Appendix C Expansion Cards and Power Requirements 242

-
1 Glossary 245
Index 255
Tell Apple Card

~
1

-
Contents ix
 Radio and television interference
The equipmenl described in this manual generates and uses radio-
frequency energy. If it is not installed and used properly-that is, in strict
accordance with Apple's instructions--it may cause interference with radio
and televisio n receptio n.
This equipment has been tested and complies with the l imits for a Class fl
computing device in accordance with the specifications in Subpart J,
Part 15, o f FCC rules. These rules are designed to provide reasonable
protectio n against such interference in a residential installation. H owever,
there is no guarantee that the interference will not occur in a particula r
installatio n , espec ially if a "rabbit-ear" television antenna is used . (A
rabbiL-ear antenna is the telescoping-rod type usually found o n television
receivers.)
You can determine whelhcr your computer is causing interference by
turning it off. If the interference slops, it was probably caused by the
computer or its peripheral d evices.
If your computer does cause interference to radio or television reception,
you can try to correct the interference by using o ne or more of the
following measures:
o Turn the television o r radio antenna until the interference stops.
o Move the computer to o ne side or the other o f the television o r radio .
o Move the computer farther away fro m the television o r radio.
o Plug the computer into an o utlet that is on a d ifferent circ uit than the
television or radio. (That is, make certain the computer and the radio or
telev ision set arc o n c ircuits controlled by different circuit breakers or
fu ses.)
o Consider installing a rooftop televisio n antenna with a coaxial cable lead-
in between the antenna and televisio n set.
If necessary, consult your authorized Apple dealer or an experienced
radio/television technician for add itional suggestions.

You may find helpful the following book lel, prepared by the r:ederal
Communicatio ns Commissio n: " H ow to Identify and Resolve Radio-TV
Interference Pro blems." This booklet is available from the U.S.
Government Printing OfTice, Washington, DC 20402. !""'!

Important This product was FCC-certified under test conditions that included use of
shielded cables and connectors between system components. It Is
important that you use shielded cables and connectors to re duce the
possibility of causing Interference to radios. t elev ision sets. and other
electronic devices. For Apple peripheral devi ces. you c a n obtain the proper
shielded cable from your authorized Apple dealer. For non-Apple peripheral
devices. contact th e manufacturer o r dealer for assistan ce.

x
 Figures and tables

Chapter 1 Se tting Up Your Macintosh II 1

Figure 1-1 Whal you should have 2

- Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
Back of Lhe main unit 4
Removing Lhe lid 8
Touching Lhe power supply case 9
Expansion slots and expansion cover shield 9
Removing the plastic hole cover 10
Figure 1-7 Aligning Lhe card 10
Figure 1-8 Inserted card 11
Figure 1-9 Repla cing Lhe lid 12
Figure 1-10 Connecting the video cable 13
Figure 1-11 Connecting the monitor p ower cord 13

- Figure
Figure
figure
Figure
1-12
1-13
1-14
1-15
Connecting the mouse 15
Connecting Lhe keyboard to Lhe main unit 16
Alternative configurations 17
Leave room for air to circulate 18

Chapter 2 Lea rning About Your Macintosh II 21

Figure 2-1 Inserting the training disk 24
Figure 2-2 Monitor brightness and contrast controls 24
Figure 2-3 Opening screen of the training disk 25
Figure 2-4 Inserti ng the System Tools disk 28
Figure 2-5 Finder screen 28
Figure 2-6 Controlling the pointer 30
Figure 2-7 Selecting an icon 31
Figure 2-8 Dragging an icon 32
Figure 2-9 Pulling down a menu 34
,..... Figure 2-10 Choosing a command 35
Figure 2-11 System Tools window 36
Figure 2-12 Using Lhe size box 38
,,_, f igure 2-13 Moving a window 39
figure 2-14 Overlapping windows 41
figu re 2-15 Making a window active 42
figure 2-16 Opening an icon in a window 43
Figure 2-17 Choosing Close li4
Figure 2-18 Using Lhe close box 45
~

- xi
 Figure 2-19 Scrolling a document 46
Figure 2-20 Using scroll arrows 46
Figure 2-21 Using the scroll box 47
Figure 2-22 TeachText scree n 49
Figure 2-23 A dialog box 51
Figure 2-24 New document icon 52
Figure 2-25 TeachText document 53
Figure 2-26 Selecting text 54
Figure 2-27 Moving the insertion point 55
Figure 2-28 Pasting in text 55
Figure 2-29 Save As dialog box 56
Figure 2-30 Changing a document's name 57
Figure 2-31 Document with its new title 57
Figure 2-32 Starting a new folder 59
Figure 2-33 Dragging a document to a folder 60
Figure 2-34 Memos Folde r opened 61
Figure 2-35 TeachText Folder opened 62
Figure 2-36 Layers of windows 62
Figure 2-37 Second level of the file hierarchy 63
Figure 2-38 Third level of the file hierarchy 64
Figure 2-39 Dialog box for the Open command 65
Figure 2-40 The next level in the hierarchy 65
Figure 2-41 Directory hie rarchy 66
Figu re 2-42 Save As dialog box 68
Figure 2-43 Choosing TeachText Folder 68
Figure 2-44 Changing a document's name 69
Figure 2-45 Selecting a group of icons 71
Figure 2-46 Overlapping information windows 72
Figure 2-47 Read Me document icon 75
Figure 2-48 Alarm Clock 76
Figure 2-49 Alarm clock settings 76

Chapter 4 Macintosh II Reference 143

Figure 4-1 Where information goes 146
n
Figure 4-2 Keyboard 147
Figure 4-3
Figure 4-4
Optional characters 149
Locking and unlocking a disk 154
n
Figure 4-5 Overlapping windows 160
Figure 4-6 A dialog box 161
Figure 4-7 Alarm Clock 163
Figure 4-8 Calculator 164
Figure 4-9 Chooser 164

xii Figures and tables

 Figure 4-10 Con trol Panel 165
Figure 4-11 Find File 167
F' Figure 4-12 Key Caps 168
Figure 4-13 Note Pad 169
Figure 4-14 Scrapbook 169
Figure 4-15 TeachText icon 170
Figure 4-16 Placing one folder inside anolher 175
Figure 4-17 Hierarchical file structure 176
Figure 4-18 Directory dialog box 177
Figure 4-19 Apple me nu 180
Figure 4-20 File menu 181
Figure 4-21 Edit menu 184
Figure 4-22 View menu 186
Figure 4-23 Special menu 187
Table 4-1 Disks and drives 153
Table 4-2 Dragging icons 179

Chapter 5 Expanding Your Macintosh II System 195

Figure 5-1 MacWrite 196
Figure 5-2 MacPaint 197
Figure 5-3 MacTerminal 198
Figure 5-4 MacProject 199
Figure 5-5 MacDraw 200
Figure 5-6 AppleShare 201
Figure 5-7 Second BOOK disk drive 203
Figure 5-8 SCSI hard disks 203
Figure 5-9 AppleTalk 204

- Figure
Figure
Figure
5-10
5-11
5-12
ImageWrite r II 205
LaserWriter 205
Apple ·Personal Modem 206

-
Figure 5-13 Monitors 207
Figure 5-14 Apple Extended Keyboard 208

Chapter6 Taking Care of Your Macintosh II 2 11

,.....
Figure 6-1 How to place the main unit 213
Figure 6-2 Disassembling the mouse 215
Figure 6-3 Cleaning the mouse 215
~ Table 6-1 Troubleshooting 218

- Figures and tables xiii

 Appendix A Working With Hard Disks 226
Figure A-1 Utilities Folder 228
Figure A-2 Apple HD SC Setup dialog box 228
Figure A-3 Hard Disk icon on the desktop 230
Figure A-4 Installer dialog box 232
Figure A-5 Connecting an Apple device to a hard disk 234
Figure A-6 Connecting multiple Apple devices to a hard
disk 235
Figure A-7 Connecting an Apple device to a Macintosh II
without a hard disk 235
Figure A-8 Connecting multiple Apple devices to a Macintosh II
without a hard disk 235
Figure A-9 Connecting a non-Apple device to a hard disk 236
Figure A-10 Connecting multiple non-Apple devices to a hard
disk 236
Figure A-11 Connecting a non-Apple device to a Macintosh II
without a hard disk 237
Figure A-12 Connecting multiple non-Apple devices to a
Macintosh II without a hard disk 237

Appendix C Expansion Cards and Power Requirements 242

Table C-1 Power limits 243

xiv Figures and tables

Finder menus 180
Apple menu 180
About the Finder... 180
Desk accessories 180
File menu 181
New Folder 181
Open 181
Print (from the Finder) 182
Close 182
Get Info 182
Duplicate 183
PutAway 183
Page Setup 183
Print Catalog 183
Eject 184
Edit menu 184
Undo 185
Cut 185
Copy 185
Paste 185
Clear 185
Select All 185
Show Clipboard 185
View menu 186
By Small Icon 186
By Icon 186
By Name 186
By Date 186
By Size 186
By Kind 186
Special menu 186
Clean Up 188
Empty Trash 188
Erase Disk 188
Set Startup 189
Use MiniFinder... 189
Restart 189
Shut Down 189
Macintosh II shortcuts 189
Double-click 190
Shift-dick 190
Close box 190
Zoom box 190

Contents vii
 Enter and Return keys 190
Tab key 191
Delete key 191
Apple key 191
Selecting by typing 192
Finder shortcuts 192
Option key 192
Apple key 193
Option and Apple keys 193
Miscellaneous 193

Chapter 5 Expanding Your Macintosh II System 195

Applications 196
MacWrite 196
MacPaint 197
MacTermin al 198
MacProject 199
MacDraw 200
AppleShare 201
And many more... 202
Hardware 202
BOOK disk drive 202
Apple SCSI hard disks 203
AppleTalk Personal Network 204
Apple ImageWriter II printer 205
Apple LaserWriter printer 205
Apple Personal Modem 206
Monitors and video cards 206
Memory expansion 207
Apple Extended Keyboard 208
Macintosh Programmer's Workshop (MPW) 208

Chapter 6 Taking Care of Your Macintosh II 211

The main unit 212
The monitor 213
The keyboard 214
The mouse 214
Disks 216
The clock battery 217 n
Service and support 217
If something goes wrong 218
General symptoms and cures 221
Miscellaneous software problems 222

viii Contents
 Preface

Welcome to Macintosh II

- In 1984 Apple introduced a computer unlike anylhing before it-the

Apple® Macintosh™ computer. Easy co learn and use, the
- /!la- Macintosh revolutionized the world's perception of compu ters. But
•. the innovations didn't stop there. The Macintosh has become m ore
- . . and more powerful: Now it has eight times the memory capacity of
the original Macintosh 128K, it's expandable, and it uses more

- sophisticated system software. And wilh hundreds of application

programs and a generous variety of optional devices to support it,
the Macintosh can do more work-faster and better than ever.
This manual introduces you to Lhe new Apple Macintosh 11
computer. Use Lhe manual now to learn basic Macintosh skills, and
pick it up again later to use as a reference. You don't need to know
anything about the Macintosh II o r any olher computer to use this
manual. And you won't have to keep l earning new ways of doing
things. Once you've mastered a few new techniques, you'll use Lhem
w henever you use your computer.

•!• Computer-guided tour: You can also take a gu ided tour of Lhe
Macintosh II by using Lhe training disk called Your Apple Tour of
the Macintosh II In the tour, your Macintosh II demonstrates
itself, introducing-in a different way-some of the same skills

- Lhis manual teaches.

Here's an overview of what's where in Lhis manual:

Chapter 1, "Setting Up Yo ur Macintosh II,'' shows how to put
cogether the mo dules of your computer-the monitor, the mouse
and Lhe keyboard-and how to install the v ideo card for you r
monitor.

- xv
 Chapter 2, "Learning About Your Macintosh II," teaches you how to
use the mouse and keyboard to operate your computer, and to get
started with your own work (including how to create it, make changes
to it, and store it to disk). It also shows you how to start the training
disk Your Apple Tour of the Macintosh I!
Chapter 3, "Your Macintosh II Step by Step," provides easy ste p-
by-step instructions for organizing, managing, and storing the
things you create.
Chapter 4, "Macintosh II Reference," explains the Macintosh
interface-the way you inte ract with the compute r no matter what
programs you're using.
Chapte r 5, "Expanding Your Macintosh II System," tells you how
your computer's capabilities can grow with the addition of new
products. It also explains some o f the applications you can get, and
what those applications can do for you.
Chapter 6, "Taking Care o f Your Macintosh II," gives you
information on how to keep your computer running at peak
efficiency-and what to do in case something goes wrong.
Appendix A, "Working With Hard Disks," shows you how to get your
hard disk ready for use, and how to use it most effectively once it's
n
set up.
Appendix B, "Macintosh II Specifications," provides the technical
details of your computer.
Appendix C, "Expansion Cards and Power Require me nts,"
explains how to figure the power available for the expansion slots.
The glossary defines all the special Macintosh terms you'll come
across in this manual.
The index lists the page refe re nces for all the topics covered in this
manual.
•!• 7he Quick Reference Card: The Quick Refere nce Card that
accompanies the manual describes some shortcuts you may wa nt
to learn as you become more familiar with you r Macintosh 11.
n
How to use this manual
No matter how much experience you've had with compute rs, read
Chapter 1 to see how to set up your Macintosh II. What you should
do next depends on your level of compute r expertise.

xv i Preface: Welcome to Macintosh II

 For the beginner
To start learning about your computer, you can use the training disk
called Your Apple Tour of the Macintosh II, where you'll learn the
basics of using an Macintosh II, with the computer itself as your
tutor. (Chapter 2 tells you how to get the disk started.) Using the
training disk is an entertaining, fun way to learn, and if you make
any mistakes, the computer lets you know and gets you back on
track. Or you might prefer to go through the written tutorial in
Chapter 2 instead. They cover the same material, but in a slightly
different way. Many people go through the disk and the tutorial.
The idea is to learn in ways that are most comfortable for you.

After the tutorial

When you've finished Your Apple Tour of the Macintosh II or the
tutorial (or both), you have several options. You can start up the
second training disk, Your Apple Tour of Macintosh II
Applications; this disk will give you an overview of the kinds of

.... applications available for your Macintosh II and how they're used.
Then you can continue on with this manual or go to the manual that
came with the application you're going to use.
Return to Chapter 3 of this manual when you want to know more
about organizing your work or performing specific tasks. Chapter 3
gives step-by-step instructions.
Use Chapter 4 for reference; it covers material you're less likely to
need right now.
Chapter 5 explains the optional equipment and application
programs available for the Macintosh II.
Read Chapter 6 sometime soon to learn how to keep your computer
clean and running up to snuff.
You'll also probably want to use the glossary of Macintosh terms
... and the index at the back of the book. The index is especially helpful
when you need to find step-by-step instructions for carrying out
specific Macintosh IT tasks.

How to use this manual xvii

 For the already initiated
If you've already had some experience using a Macintosh
computer, you can probably skip the training disk and the tutorial in
Chapter 2. The keyboard layout on the Macintosh II is somewhat
different from most earlier models, however; see 11 The Keyboard"
in Chapter 4 and, if it applies to you, "Apple Extended Keyboard"
in Chapter 5.
Depending on which Macintosh you've used, you might not have
experience with the hierarchical file system. This file system lets
you organize your folders, applications, and documents in a more i-.
I '

efficient way than was possible on older Macintosh computers.

You'll find details in The Hierarchical File System" in Chapter 4.
11

Your Macintosh II works with a number of optional devices: two

styles of keyboard, internal and external hard disks, a second
internal 3.5-inch disk drive, and more. Additionally, it can work
together in new ways with printers, file servers, and other computers
on the AppleTalk® Personal Network. Read Chapter 5 for details.
,., I

Important If you already own a Macintosh and have application disks you
use as startup disks, you'll want to update the system flles on
those disks to take advantage of new features. However, If you
plan to use the same application disk as a startup disk on the
Macintosh II and on an earlier model of Macintosh computer,
don't update the disks until you have read "'Startup Disks" in
Chapter 4.

For the advanced user

This manual is not a technical reference manual. (You may already
have noticed that.) Appendix B contains some technical
information about the Macintosh II, but if you need more, look for
the Apple Technical Library-a series of official technical
publications from Apple Computer, Inc., and published by
Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Inc. You'll find the Apple
Technical Library in most well-stocked bookstores.

xviii Preface: Welcome to Macintosh II

Another source for technical information about the Macintosh II
(and other Apple products) is the Apple Programmer's and
Developer's Association. For information about the association,
call (206) 251-6548. You can also write to
Apple Programmer's and Developer's Association
290 S.W. 43rd Street
Renton, WA 98055
You'll find a membership application for the Apple Programmer's
and Developer's Association in the box with your computer.
If you're an applications developer interested in creating programs
for the Macintosh, ask your authorized Apple dealer about the
Macintosh Programmer's Workshop-a programming
environment for the Macintosh that includes an assembler and C
and Pascal compilers. Version 2.0 (and any later version) supports
the Macintosh IT. If you plan to develop applications fo r sale
through retail channels, you can get valuable support from Apple
Developer Relations. Write to
Apple Developer Relations
Mailstop 27-W
Apple Computer, Inc.
20525 Mariani Avenue
Cupertino, CA 95014

User groups
Ask your dealer for the name of a Macintosh user group near you. If
you live in the United States, you can caII (800) 538-9696 for the
name, address, and telephone number of up to three Macintosh
user groups in you r geographical area.
Outside the United States, ask your dealer to get in touch with
The Boston Computer Society Berke ley Macintosh User Group
One Center Plaza 1442-A Walnut Street #62
Boston, MA 02108 Berke ley, CA 94709
(617) 367-8080 (415) 849-9114
Either of these organizations can provide you with the name of a
Macintosh user group near you. You can also join either of these
groups or ask them for information on starting your own Macintosh
user group.

User groups xix

 Setting up your Macintosh II computer is easy and takes only a few
minutes. If somebody has already set up your computer for you, you
can skip this chapter and go right to Chapter 2; there you'll learn
how to use your Macintosh II.

Unpacking
The first thing to do is to make sure you have everything you need to
set up a complete system. Take all the mate rials out of the packing
boxes and see if you have everything shown in Figure 1-1:

Monitor

Main unit power cord

~ ---i
---n~~~~-
(_,,~ ~

Figure 1-1
What you should have

2 Chapter 1: Setting Up Your Macintosh II

 Check your packing lists to make sure you have everything. Then fill
out the registration card and mail it in. (The registration card asks
for serial numbers; you'll find them either on the bottom or at the
back of each module.) In the unlikely event that something is
missing, call your authorized Apple dealer immediately.
•!• Different keyboard? Your keyboard might look different from
the one in Figure 1-1. Apple offers two keyboards: the Apple
Keyboard and the Apple Extended Keyboard. You can find out
more about the extended keyboard in Chapter 5, "Expanding
Your Macintosh II System."
Choose a sturdy place to set up your system-no card tables or
other surfaces that could be tipped or knocked over. To avoid glare,
pick a place where light won't be reflected into your eyes and you
won't be facing bright light.
Your computer needs to be plugged into a three-hole grounded
outlet. If you have more than two devices that need to be plugged
into the wall, you should get a grounding power strip. Available at
any electronics or hardware store, a power strip is like a wall socket
with four to eight outlets; many of these power strips come with an
on/off switch for convenience and a surge protector (which acts like
a circuit breaker if there's a surge of power on the incoming
....
I
electrical lines) .
•!• Save the packing material: Store away the boxes and all the
packing material. Repack your computer system if you have to
move it over long distances (that is, any distance that requires a
car or airplane) to protect the system from rough handling and
jarring. It's especially important to repack your computer if it
has an internal hard disk.

~
I

Unpacking 3
 Before you go on, turn the main unit so that you're looking at the
back of it. Figure 1-2 shows you what the ports, connectors, and so
on are all about:

Expansion slot covers

Main pawe'

Power
lnp~
swit_c_h---------~
---
~ llllll IIlllllll IIIllillll
~1
[[I]lTI1:0
/
Sound jack -
Apple DeskTop Bus ports -----~­

Apple Serial Interface ports - - - ---L-'

SCSI port - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - /

Figure 1-2
Back of the main unit
-
You will be using a number of these ports and receptacles as you set
up your Macintosh II. One item you'll find on the back of the main
unit, the power switch, is there when you have to use it but is not
intended for regular use. In the normal course of events, you turn
on the computer with the Power On key at the top of the keyboard,
and you turn it off by choosing Shut Down from the Special menu
that appea rs on the Finder screen. (Don't worry if these terms are
new to you. You'll learn exactly what to do in Chapter 2, "Learning
About Your Macintosh 11. ")
If you e ncounte r a problem with the computer and for some reason
cannot use the Shut Down command to turn it off, you can push the
power switch instead. (Be sure you only push it once.) Wait a few
seconds, and the computer will turn itself off. The n you can start it
again by pressing the Power On key. Note that this method of
turning off the compute r can be fairly drastic, and you may lose any
work you had not previously saved on a disk.
-

4 Chapter l : Setting Up Your Macintosh II

-
- Important safety instructions
You're almost ready to plug in your Macintosh ll, but first read these
important safety instructions.

Warning This equipment Is Intended to be electrically grounded. Your

computer Is equipped with a three-wire grounding plug- a plug
that has a third (grounding) pin. This plug will flt only a
grounding-type AC outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are
unable to insert the plug Into the outlet. contact a licensed
electrlclan to replace the outlet with a properly grounded plug.
Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding plugl

For your own safety and the safety of your equipment, always take
the following precautions:
Disconnect the power plug (by pulling on the plug, not the cord)
under these circumstances:
o if the power cord or plug is frayed or otherwise damaged
o if anything is spilled into the case
o if your equipment is exposed to rain or any other excess moisture
o if it has been dropped or if the case has been otherwise damaged
o if you suspect that your computer needs servicing or repair
o whenever you clean the case
Be sure that you always do the following:
o Keep all air vents clear. Leave 4 to 6 inches of clearance between
the vents on both sides of the main unit and any object that may
restrict air flow. If you place your monitor on top of the main
unit, it should not lie "flat"; make sure it sits at least 8 mm (.314
inches) above the surface of the main unit. (Apple monitors
come with little rubber "feet" to raise them the correct distance,
allowing for air to circulate properly.)

- o Keep your equipment away from any source of liquid (such as

wash basins, bathtubs, and shower stalls). If you drink coffee
while you're at your computer, take care not to spill.
D Keep it protected from damp or wet weather.

Important safety instructions 5

 o Read all the installation instructions carefully before you plug lhe
product into a wall socket
o Keep these instructions handy for reference.
o Follow all instructions and warnings dealing with your system.

Warning Electrical equipment may be hazardous If misused. Operation of

this product or similar products must always be supervised by
an adult. Do not allow c hildren access to the interio r of any
electrical product . and do no t permit them to handle cables.

To clean the case:

1. Disconnect the power plug by pulling on the plug, not the

cord.

2. Wipe the case with a clean, soft cloth moistened with water.
Wipe the surfaces lightly, but do not wipe the monitor screen.
For cleaning the screen, use only a dry, sofc cloth.

Plugging it all together

Now you can begin to pull together the modules of your computer
system. Assemble the system in the order given in the next few
-
pages.

Connecting the power cord

The first step in assembling your compute r system is attaching and
-
plugging in the power cord. The plugged-in power cord acts as a

-
ground for the system, p rotecting its components from static
electrical discharge.

6 Chapter l : Setting Up Your Mac intosh II

 To connect the powe r cord:

1. Connect the socket end of the power cord Into the main
power Input-the bottom receptacle on the right side,
viewed from the rear. (See Figure 1-2.)
The connector above the main power input is for the monitor
power output; you'll read about that in a moment.

2. Plug the other end of the power cord into a three-hole

grounded outlet.

Warning Do not turn on the computer system until you've completed

the entire Installation process. Turning on the system at the
w rong time could result In electrical shock to you or cause
damage to your computer system's components.
If the power has been on, turn it off and wait at least 5 minutes
before connecting anything to or disconnecting anything from
your computer. There are several ways to turn off the
computer. If you know how to c hoose Shut Down from the
Special menu. do that. If you're still unfamiliar with how to use
such commands, push once on the external power switch
(found on the back of the main unit) and wait for it to shut Itself
down. (See Figure 1-2 if you need help locating the power
switch.) If all else falls, pull the plug on the power cord (from the
three-hole grounded outlet).

Connecting the monitor

Apple provides color and monochrome monitors to go with your
Macintosh II. (They're described under "Monitors and Video
Cards" in Chapter 5.) Basic installation is the same for all the
monitors. The monitor connects to your computer through the
socket on a peripheral card (in this case, a video card) installed in
an expansion slot in the computer's main unit.
Here are the stages you'll go through to install your monitor. Right
after this general list, you'll find specific steps for each stage of the
procedure:
o installing the video card in the main unit
o connecting the monitor's video cable
o connecting the monitor's power cord

Plugging It a ll together 7
 Installing the video cord in the main unit
Follow these steps to install the video card.

l. Remove the lid from the computer's main unit. (See

Figure 1-3.)
o Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, loosen and remove the
security screw holding the lid to the main unit (It's at the top
center of the rear panel.)
o Wrap your hands around the rear corners of the case (as
shown in Figure 1-3).

Figure 1-3
Removing the lid

o Press on the latches as you lift up on the back of the lid.

o When you feel it release, lift the lid all the way off the case and
put it aside.

2. Touch the power supply case Inside the computer to

discharge any static electricity that might be on your
clothes or body. (See Figure 1-4.)

8 Chapter 1: Setting Up Your Macintosh II

 Warn ing It's OK to touch the power supply If you've just unpac ked It.
However, the power supply can get hot In normal use. If the
comp uter has been on , shut It o ff and w ait at least 5 minutes
b e fore touching the power supply.

c I1--::::= = ::--

Pow er supply case ----tt--c!~ ~~~lb='-~

c~
Figure 1-4
Touc hing the p ower supply c ase

3. Choose the expansion slot you want to use. (See

Figure 1-5.).
The expansion slots are the narrow, plastic strips running along
the bottom of the main unit, near the b ack. Which one you use
doesn't matte r.
1/0 shield
~
Expansion slots
c ~ I

~~~rnJ~U(
Install vid e o card.
~
" Expansion
cover
shield ----+-
/
c

Figure 1-5
Expansion slo ts and
e xp a nsion c over shield

Plugging it all togethe r 9

 4. Remove the expansion cover shield that's behind the
expansion slot you plan to use by lifting up until the shield is
free of the guide and pin.
Save the shield; you will need it later if you take the card out of the
slot. The card itself has a shield attached to it that will replace the
shield you just removed.

/
J 5. Push out the plastic hole cover that lines up with the slot
you plan to use. (See Figure 1-6.)
o Grasp the cover with your thumb inside the computer and your
~rf( ~~ fingers outside.
~~ ~~
I-_t\j
qi \ o Push the cover out with your thumb and set it aside.

() ~ 6. Insert the video card Into the expansion slot.

lllllill~ ~ f~/ o Pick up the video card by the top of the metal bracket and the
~jlllj111 Y
10
lop of the card's other end. (Be careful not lo touch the pins
II on the bottom of the card.)
o The expansion cover shield on the card attaches to the inside
Hole cover
of the back panel in the same way as the shield you removed in
Figure 1-6 step 4. Align the card so that the guide fits through the lowe r
Removing the plastic slot in the shield on the card and the p in sticks up slightly
hole cover
through the hole at the lop of the shield. (See Figure 1-7.)

Figure 1- 7 -
Aligning the card

-
10 Chapter 1: Setting Up Your Macintosh II
 o Align the connector on the bottom of the card, directly over
the slot.
o Place one hand along Lhe top edge of the card, directly over
the connector area, and push down firmly until the connector
is fully seated. (See Figure 1-8.)

Important Don't force the card. If you meet a lot of resistance, pull the
card out and try again .
Don't wiggle the card from side to side when you Insert It.
Wiggling the card puts unnecessary stress on the card and slot.

Figure 1-8
Inserted card

You can test to see if the card is properly connected by lifting the
card gently. If it resists and stays in place, it's connected.
•!• Universal card installation: If you have purchased other
peripheral devices that require cards, install them now, too.
You can use this same method (that is, repeat steps 1 through 6)
for installing all expansion cards in your Macintosh II at any
time. Remember: if the computer has been running, let it cool

- down for 5 minutes before you open up the main unit. Of

course, you should also read and follow any instructions that
come with other expansion cards you may have.

Important If you plan to Install more than one card, see Appendix C for
details on the power available for the expansion slots.

Plugging It all together 11

 7. Replace the lld on the main unit. (See Figure 1-9.)
o Tip the front of the lid down so that it catches the three hooks
under the lid in the front of the main unit's case. r""'I
o Lower the back of the lid onto the case until the rear latches
snap into place.
o Replace and tighten the security screw.

Caution When relnstalllng the lld, ensure that It Is p roperly seated

before turning on the power. To check, p ress firmly down at the
two rear and three front latch positions.

Figure 1-9
Replacing the lid

Connecting the video cable

With the back of the main unit still facing you, place your monitor
near the main unit. Turn the monitor so that its back is also facing
you. Then follow these steps to connect the video cable. (See
Figure 1-10.)

1. Push one end of the video cable (both ends are the same)
Into the video socket on the back of the monitor.
The socket is marked with a video icon.

2. Tighten the thumbscrews on the jack to prevent the

connection from coming loose and to prevent radio and
television Interference.

12 Chapter l: Setting Up Your Macintosh II

3. Connect the other end of the video cable to the socket on
the video card, and tighten the thumbscrews.
Connect the cable to the card through the opening in the rear of
the computer.
•!• More than one card? If you have installed more than one
expansion card, be careful to plug the video cable into the
video card.

,_J l_ _ J

Figure 1-10
Connecting the video cable

Connecting the monitor's power cord

Follow these steps to connect the monitor's power cord. (See
Figure 1-11.)

1. Push the socket end of the monitor power cord into the
monitor power Input receptacle on the back of the monitor.
The plug is marked with a power icon.

Figure 1-11
Connecting the monitor power cord

Plugging It a ll together 13
 ,...,
I

2. Connect the other end of the power cord to the monitor

power output receptacle on the back of the main unit.
The monitor power output is on the right side of the main unit,
just above the main power input receptacle.
For information about adjusting brightness and contrast (and
alignment, in the case of the color monitor), see the manual that
came with your monitor. But don't adjust anything yet; to save
yourself the trouble of turning around the monitor and main unit
again, wait until you've attached the keyboard and the mouse.

Connecting the mouse and the keyboard

There are several ways to connect.the mouse and the keyboard. The i-i
I
steps below show how to connect the mouse to the keyboard and
finally how to connect the keyboard to the main unit. When you've
completed this procedure, you'll find information on alternative
ways to connect these devices.
•!• Avoid premature power on: The steps are presented in this
order so that the last thing you do is connect the keyboard to a
power source. Once the keyboard has power, anyone could
accidentally press the Power On key and turn on your computer
before it's appropriate.

14 Chapter 1: Setting Up Your Macintosh II

Place your keyboard near the back of the main unit with the
keyboard facing you. Then follow these steps.

1. Plug the mouse cable into the connector on t he right side of

the keyboard. (See Figure 1-12.)
If you're left-handed, plug it into the connector on the left side.
This kind of arrangement is known as a daisy chain. On effect,
the mouse w ill be connected to the computer through the
keyboard.)

t_J
l_I
;_- ~=· ~·-~

~l !!ll~~UllffCi~] l:?

Figure 1·12
Connecting the mouse

2. Plug one end of the keyboard cable Into the remaining

connecto r on the keyboard.

Plugging It all together 15

 3. Plug the other and of the keyboard c able into either of the
n
two round connectors on the back of the main unit. (See
Figure 1-13.)
The connectors are just to the right of the sound jack.
n
Your Macintosh II works with a variety of keyboards. Keyboa rds
may look different, but you attach them to the main unit in the
same way.

Figure 1-1 3
Connecting the keyboard to the main unit

Why two connectors?

The official name for this set of connectors is the Apple DeskTop
Bus™. It's called a bus because several different devices (the
keyboard, the mouse , and other Apple DeskTop Bus devices such as
a graphics tablet, a joystick, or another keyboard) can send infor-
mation along one "bus : ne" to the computer. Your Macintosh 11
has two of these connectors. Figure 1-14 shows different ways to
connect other Apple DcskTop Bus devices.

16 Chapter l: Setting Up Your Macintosh II

Figure 1-14
Alternative configurations

You might prefer to plug the mouse into the other connector on the
back of lhe Macintosh II, leaving the second connector on the
keyboard free for now. It's up to you. Figure 1-14 shows two possible
arrangements.
If you have other Apple DeskTop Bus devices to attach to your
system, you can either daisy-chain them to the keyboard or use one
of the back panel connecto rs.

Ready to go?
O nce you're satisfied that everything is connected properly, you'll
want to arrange your Macintosh lI components conveniently in your
work area. Turn the main unit so that it's facing you. Place the
monitor where you want it (on top of the main unit is fine), and
position the keyboard and mouse where you can reach them
comfortably.

Plugging It all together 17

 Warning Always keep your computer's main unit flat. sitting on its rubber
feet. Standing It on edge defeats the cooling design a nd is
likely to make your computer overhea t . This may eventually
damage the main unit. (See Figure 1-15.)

-
~t~-1 - I(I
Right way Wrong way

Figure 1-15
Leave room for air to circulate

Other devices
You may have purchased other equipment, such as a printer, an
external disk drive, or a modem. You'll find instructions for
connecting those devices in the manuals that came with them.

Warning There Is one SCSI port o n the back o f the main unit. (SCSI.
commonly p ronounced "skuh '-zee: Is short for Small Computer
System Interface.) If you're using an external SCSI device of any
kind. you must connect that device to the SCSI port.
Connecting a SCSI device to the wrong port can damage your
system . You can also damage the system If you mistakenly
connect a non-SCSI device (with an RS-232 plug, for example)
to this port. Read the manual that came with the device; a lso
read "Adding SCSI Terminators· in Appendix A for Important
instruc tions about SCSI terminato rs.

18 Chapter 1: Setting Up Your Macintosh II

Internal° hard disk users
If your system includes an internal hard disk, you might need to
prepare it for use; this is explained in Appendix A, "Working With
Hard Disks." For the veteran Macintosh user, that's easy-go to
Appendix A now. But if you're new, the procedure requires a few
techniques you need to learn first. Skip setting up your hard disk for
now and go on to Chapter 2, "Learning About Your Macintosh II."
After you've mastered some Macintosh techniques, go to Appendix
A and get your hard disk ready for use.

Let's get startedl

Now that your system's all set up (or set up as much as it needs to be
for now), go on to Chapte r 2 and learn how to start using your Apple
Macintosh II computer.

Let' s get started! 19

 If you've used "traditional" computers, you'll really appreciate the
Macintosh difference. No more guessing w hat the computer wants.
No more memorizing long commands with names only a
programmer could love. With Macintosh, you're in charge.
Macintosh removes a lot of the mystery about using computers.
Every action you take has an effect you can see-so you're always in
control of what happens. And you don't have to keep tedious details
in your head, because Macintosh keeps track of them for you.
You're free to think about what you want to do rather than how to get
your computer to do it.
Documents are whatever This chapter teaches what you need to know to use your Macintosh
you create with
Macintosh applications- II-how to create documents, make changes to them, and put
information you enter. them away. It all happens w ith a few basic techniques, the same
modify. view. or save. Macintosh techniques you'll use w heneve r you work with almost all
An application is a Macintosh applications on your Macintosh II.
software program that
helps you perform your
work. It's short for
appl/catlon program. and is
often used interchange-
ably with program. Training disk or tutorial?
You're almost ready to start up your Macintosh 11 computer and sec
it in action, but first you have a choice to make. The material
presented in this chapter is also taught on one of the training disks
that came with your computer-Your Apple Tour of the Macintosh
If. Both the book and the disk are designed to give you first-hand
experience using the compute r, but in different ways.
The training disk is an interactive guide to the Macintosh II. That
means it teaches you Macintosh concepts and techniques, prompts
you step by step, and corrects you when you've made a mistake. It
provides you with an e nte rtaining but controlled learn ing
environment.
The tutorial in this chapter uses real software applicatio ns to teach
you the same techniques. He re, you're in the actual working
environment that you'll use w he never you work with your Macintosh
II. Even with the actual software applications, you won't make any

22 Chapter 2: Learning About Your Macintosh II

 mistakes if you follow the directions step by step. Whether you use
the disk or the tutorial is up to you. You may find it helpfuJ to use
both.
If you would like to take the guided tour, follow the steps below in
"The Training Disk." If you 'd rathe r stay with the printed page, skip
now to the section "The Tutorial. " Either way, you'll be a confident
Macintosh user in no time.

The training disk

Follow these steps to start up Your Apple Tour of the Macintosh II.

1. Turn your computer on by pressing the Power On key (at the

-
top of t he keyboard).
A beep lets you know it's started. If this is the first time you've
Power O n key turned on the power, a small ye llow sheet of plastic will pop out
of the disk drive (or drives, if your system includes the optional
second internal drive). Re move the plastic piece from the disk
drive, but don't discard it; if you ever nee d to transport your
Macintosh II, you'll want to insert the plastic piece to prevent
damage during shipping.

I~
An icon (a small picture) re presenting a Macintosh disk appea rs
on the screen. The blinking question mark shows that the
Macintosh II is ready for you to insert a disk.

Important If the Icon with the blinking question mark does not appear and
your system Includes the Internal hard disk, someone may
a lready have prepared the hard d isk for you. For now, turn off
the Macintosh II. (To turn the system off at this time , push once
on the power switch on the back of the main unit. Facing the
back of the main unit, you'll see the power switch In the
bottom-left corner. (See Figure 1-2.) Once the power is off, wait
a few second s a nd follow step 2. Then press the Power On key
to turn the computer back on again. If that doesn't work. go
on to "Problems Starting Up?" later in this chapter. If none of
the suggestions there works, contact your authorized Apple
dealer or representative .

The training d isk 23

 2. Insert the disk labeled Your Apple Tour of the Macintosh II
into the d isk drive, metal end first, label side up.
If you have two disk drives, insert the disk into the one on the
right.
When the disk is most of the way into the disk drive, the
Macintosh II automatically pulls it in, and the disk "kerchunks"
into place. As the Macintosh II starts up the guided tour, you'll
hear a series of soft noises. After a few moments, you should see a
display welcoming you to Macintosh II.

3. Adjust the brightness and contrast controls on your monitor

to the level you want.
Label side up, metal end first See the manual that came with your monitor for instructions.
Figure 2-1
Inserting the training disk

~~ l
Brlghtnes s )
Contrast )

I J

Figure 2-2
Monitor brightness and contrast controls

4. Follow the Instructions that appear on the screen.

You've already begun to learn about Macintosh II.

24 Chapte r 2: Learning About Your Macintosh II

 Welcome to your Apple~
Tour of the MacintoshMII

If IJOU've- used this: tour btfor•, vou m•y sk;p to

the main menu bv ollck!n9 th• mouse button.

-
- ~ t 987 App It Computer, lne.

Figure 2- 3
Opening screen of the tra ining disk

Use the training disk as long as you like. Anything you need to know
to use the disk will be explained right on the screen.

Problems starting up?

If what's in Figure 2-3 doesn't appear on your screen, go through
this checklist to see if you can identify the problem:
o Is the computer plugged into a power source?
o Is the power cord plugged into the computer?
o If your compute r is plugged into a power strip, is the power strip
turned o n?
o Is the monitor connected to the computer p roperly?
o Is the monitor power cord plugged in?
o Is the computer turned on? (Look for a light on the front left side
of the main unit.) If there's no light, push the Power On key.

- The training disk 25

 o Is the monitor on? (Look for a light on the front of the monitor.)
See the manual that came with the monitor if you need help
turning on the power.
o Is the brightness control adjusted correctly? See Figure 2-3 to
locate the brightness control on the monitor.
o Are you using the correct disk? To check, hold down the Apple
and Shift keys while you press the 1 key on the main keyboard.
This will eject the disk. Make sure it's titled Your Apple Tour ofthe
Macintosh Il
o If you have an internal hard disk, did you turn off the Macintosh II
before inserting the training disk? (See the "Important" message
at the end of step 1 of the procedure.)
If you can't identify the problem yourself, get help from your
authorized Apple dealer or representative.

What to do when you're finished

When you're ready to stop using the training disk:

1. Choose Let's Quit from the main menu.

This will shut down the computer and eject the training disk.

2. Take the training disk out of the drive.

3. To continue working with the Macintosh II, you can do one

of the following:
o Go through the written tutorial (below) for some additional
practice.
o Insert the second training disk, Your Apple Tour of Macintosh
~
II Applications. Then press the Power On key (at the top of the ' \
keyboard) to restart the computer and learn about some of the
many applications you can run on your Macintosh II.
o Press the Power On key to restart the computer, insert the
The System Tools disk System Tools disk, and experiment with the Finder.
contains Important
utilities you can use to o Start any of your applications (following the instructions in the
maintain and update your manual that came with the application).
computer system and
application disks.

26 Chapter 2: Learning About Your Macintosh II

 Impo rtant You may have to use the Installer on the System Tools d isk to
update the system software on your application disks before
they'll work on the Macintosh II. (It's easy!) You'll find
instructions for using the Installer in Chapter 3, "Your Macintosh
II Step by Step .•

If your system includes the internal hard disk, go now to Appendix A

to get your hard disk set up and running.

The tutorial
If you used the training disk Your Apple Tour of the Macintosh II,
you already know how to get your system started, so the following
steps will sound familiar. Just follow the numbe red steps until you
get into new territory.
Follow these steps to start up the Macintosh II.

1. Turn on your computer by pressing the Power On key (at the

top of the keyboard).
<J A beep lets you know it's started. If this is the first time you've
Power On key turned on the powe r, a yellow sheet of plastic will pop out of the
disk drive (or drives, if you r system includes the optional second
internal drive). Re move the plastic piece from the disk drive, but
don't discard it; inserting it in the disk drive p revents damage
during shipping if you ever need to transport your Macintosh II.
An icon representing a Macintosh d isk appears on the screen.
The blinking question mark shows that the Macintosh II is ready
for you to insert a disk.

Important If somebody has a lready set up your system for you a nd your
system includes the Internal hard disk, your screen might not
show the disk icon with the b linking question mark. Instead It
might look look Ilka the one In Figure 2-5. Don't panic-
everything Is still all right.

The tutorial 27
 2. Insert the disk labeled System Tools Into the disk d rive, metal
end first, label side up.
If you have two disk drives, use the one on the right. \'<fhen the
disk is most of the way into the disk drive, the computer
automatically pulls it in , and the disk "kerchunks" into place.
The soft hum means your computer is getting information from
the disk. A message appears, welcomi ng you to Macintosh, and
after a few seconds you'll see this screen:

Figure 2-4
Inserting the System Tools d isk

Figure 2-5
Finder screen

This is the Macintosh II Finder, a special application you use to

organize and manage your documents, and to start other
applications. You use the Finder every time you start you r
Macintosh II or move from one application to another. Ir's like a
"home base" for operating your compute r's applicatio ns.

3. Adjust the brightness and contrast con tro ls on your monitor

to the leve l you want.
See the ma nual that came with your monitor for instructions.

28 Chapter 2: Learning About Your Ma cint osh II

n
The working environment is called the desktop. While most
computer screens look like the departing flight schedule at a busy
airport, the Macintosh desktop can be as clear and clean as you
want to make it; it's yours to arrange any way that pleases you. You
can slide documents around, organize your work in folders, throw
things away, or get what you want to work on next-just by moving
the mouse and pressing the mouse button.
The bar at the top of the screen contains menus; you'll see how to
use them a little later. The icons on your desktop always let you know
what's available. Right now you see icons that represent
o the System Tools disk you inserted
o the Trash, where you can discard what you don't need anymore
•!• Differrmt screen.? If your screen doesn't look like this, someone
else has probably used this lesson and arranged the desktop in a
different way. After you learn in the next section how to use the
mouse, see "Handling Windows'' in Chapter 3 to close all
windows that may have been left open. If someone has already
set up the optional internal hard disk, you'll see an extra icon.
For the time being, just ignore the hard disk icon as you go
through the rest of this tutorial. If you have other troubles
starting up, read the suggestions in Problems Starting Up?"
11

earlier in this chapter.

Mouse basics
Your Macintosh II responds instantly to every movement you make
with the mouse. You can start applications and get documents,
work on them, and put them away again-just by moving the mouse
and pressing the mouse button. The best way to see how this works
is to try it.

The tutorial 29
 n

Figure 2-6
Controlling the pointer

Moving the pointer by moving the mouse

1. Watch the screen while you roll the mouse on a flat surface
next to your computer. For now, don't press the mouse
button.
Every move you make w ilh the mouse mo.ves the pointer in
exaclly the same way.
Usually the pointer is shaped like an arrow, as it is now, but it
changes shape depending on w hat you're doing. For instance, it
becomes an I-beam when it's positioned over text you can edit,
or a wristwatch when the Macintosh II is doing something that
takes a little time.
You 'II have the best control if you hold the mouse with the mouse
cable pointing directly away from you.

2. Pick the mouse up and put it down in a different place.

If you run out of room fo r the mouse- if it goes off the table, for
instance, or runs into the Macintosh II itself-lift the mouse and
put it down again where you have more room. Lifting the mouse
doesn't move the pointer.

30 Chapte r 2: Learning About Your Macintosh II

 Using the mouse might feel a Jillie awkward at first, but it will soon be
second nature.

Selecting by clicking an icon

Macintosh lets you organize your desktop any way you want, so the
first thing to do with your mouse is arrange the desktop to suit you.
This may not seem like a big deal now, but you'll appreciate it when
your desktop gets cluttered with icons. To move an icon, you first
select it to Jet your Macintosh n know this is what you want to work
on next. You select icons by using a technique called clicking.

1. Posi tion the pointer on the Trash ico n.

Make sure the tip of the pointer is o n the icon.

2. Click the icon by pressing and immedia tely releasing the

mouse button.

- Ii file l!11I Uiew Spern11

- Figure 2-7
Selecting an icon

The tutorial 31
 As you dick the icon, it becomes highlighted. What was white is
now black, and vice versa. The highlighting shows that you
selected it. Notice that the System Tools icon is no longer
highlighted. Selecting has a specific meaning in the Macintosh
vocabulary: you always select the information you want to work
on next.

3. Click the System Tools icon.

Now the System Tools icon is selected, and the Trash icon is no
longer selected.
When clicking, try not to move the mouse as you release the mouse
button. Practice clicking each icon in turn until you can click without
moving the mouse at all .

Dragging an icon
Once you've selected an icon, you can use the mouse to move the
icon with a technique called dragging.

ti File Edit Uiew Special

Figure 2-8
Dragging an icon

32 Chapt er 2: Learning About Your Macintosh II

1. Position the pointer on the Trash Icon.

2. Press and hold the mouse button while you move the
mouse.
When you press the mouse button, you select the icon. As you
move the mouse, the pointer moves and drags an outline of the
icon and its name along with it. So you always know where you
were-and where you're going.

3. Release the mouse button.

The icon snaps to its new place.
Try this again with the System Tools icon. Move the icon all the way
to the left. Notice that it won't go off the edge of the screen, so you
don't have to worry about losing it. Remember, lifting the mouse
has no effect on what you're doing (but releasing the mouse button
does end the current dragging and places the icon where it was when
you released the mouse button).
If you change your mind, you can cancel a drag in process by
moving the pointer into the menu bar at the top of the screen and
releasing the mouse button. Practice dragging until you can easily
put the icons wherever you want them.
You've learned how to use the mouse to point to and select
information you want to work on, and you've seen how you can drag
icons to arrange your desktop. Next you'll learn how to act on what
you select by choosing a command from a menu.
•!• Take a break: You can take a break from this lesson at any
point. Just leave the Macintosh II switched on and pick up where
you left off. If the computer has been switched off, make sure the
System Tools disk is inserted, switch the computer back on, and
pick up where you left off.

The tutorial 33
 Selecting and choosing
Whenever you work w ith your Macintosh II, you tell it two things:
what you want to work on, and what you want to do. fi rst, you tell the
Macintosh II what you want to work on by selecting it as you've been
doing with icons on the desktop. Then you tell the Macintosh II what
you want to do with the selection. You usually do this by choosing a
command from a menu.
Now you want to work on the System Tools disk, and you need to
open its icon to examine its contents.

Selecting the System Tools icon

• Position the pointer on the System Tools icon and click.

This is the same thing you did before. Now the System Tools icon is
selected, and you can choose a command for it.

Pulling down a menu

Along the top of the screen, in the menu bar, are titles of the
menus.

· Edit lliew Spec ldl

:)(:N
3€0
Print
I: lose

Get Info 3€ 1
Dimmed command (you can't oupl11:<11<! :)[:I)
use It right now)_ _ _ __ _ ___,;._ + Put nurnq

Pill.JP Sel\111...
Print [ 11tnlo1_1 ...

Figure 2-9
Pulling down a menu

l. Position the pointer on the word File In the menu bar.

Among other things, the File menu lets you open icons.

34 Chapter 2: Learning About Your Macintosh II

 2. Without moving the mouse for now, press and hold the
mouse button. Release It when you're finished looking.
Pressing the button while you're pointing to a menu title causes
the title to be highlighted and a menu to appear. The menu

- contains commands you can carry out o n what you've selected.

(Commands that you can't use right now-the Print command,
for instance-appear dimmed in the me nu .) When you release
the mouse button, the menu disappears.

Choosing a command from a menu

To choose a command from a menu, you use the same dragging
technique you used to move icons.

- 1. Position the pointer again on the word File in the menu bar.

2. This time, pre ss the m o use button and hold it down while you
drag the pointer to the word Open ; then re lease the mouse
button.

Print
r lose
Ge t Info
~""" 01J() lft:d1<!
""• --- • u,UllJl
----- ........... .. -----""'- .

Figure 2- 10
Choosing a command

As you drag through a menu, each usable command is

highlighted in tu rn. If you change your mind about choosing a
command, move the pointer off the menu and release the mouse
button. Nothing is chosen unless you release the mouse button
while one of the commands is h ighlighted.

- The tutorial 35
 When you release the mouse button with the Open command
highlighted, an outline zooms out of the System Tools icon, and
the screen is almost filled by a window. This window displays a
directory of icons that represent the contents of the S)lstem
Tools disk. (If a window doesn't appear, make sure the System
Tools icon is selected before you choose Open from the File
me nu.)

The System Tools icon is hollow now to show that the icon has been -
opened into a window.

Title bar
'er file ld1t L11ew S ec1a1 --

Close box------------!=~;; ~~--- Syst= oo-ls- - - - -... c-- =

4 1tems 537K io d1Sk 242K a va1l•blf

Hollow icon ----------.....J==================~~--..J

LJ LJ Sy s tem Folder Utilities Fold•c

Folder Icon- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --+

-
Updat• Foldec r ..chT•xt

Size b ox - - - - - - - - - - - - + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Figure 2-11
System Tools w indow

The title of the System Tools window appears in the title bar at the
to p of the window. Below the ti tle bar is information about the
w indow's conte nts. Along the right and bottom arc scroll bars that
let you get around in large d irectories or docume nts. In the bottom-
right corner is the size box you use to change the size of a window.
At the top-left corner is a close box, and at the top-right corner is a
zoom box that zooms the window out so it nearly covers the screen.
In a few minutes, you'll sec how to use these parts of a window to
ma ni pulate it.

36 Chapter 2: Learning About Your Macintosh II

 To sum up what you've done so far: first you selected something (the
System Tools icon), then you chose a command (Open). You'll
follow this same pattern whenever you work with your Macintosh II:
select some informatio n, then choose an action for it.
There are four icons in the System Tools window; they re present
Folders hold documents. folders and an application that are on the System Tools disk:
applications. or other
folders on the d esktop. o The System Folder ho lds the system software the Macintosh JI
needs to operate.
Utility prog rams ore o The Utilities Folder contains special utility programs you'll use
special applications that later, after you've worked with your system for a while.
usually change something
in a system file. You'll o The Update Folder contains docume nts that give you late-
learn more about utility
programs In Chapters 3
breaking information about your computer or software.
and4. o TeachTe..-.i:t is the application you use to read the documents in
the Update Folder.
You'll learn more about the Update Folder and TeachText as you go
through this tutorial.

-
•:• Other utilities: You r Macintosh II comes with lots of utilities;
some are included on a separate utilities disk and are explained
in the Macintosh System Utiltties User's Guide.

- Manipulating windows
Just as you can arrange icons on the desktop to suit you, you can also
arrange windows to your liking.

Changing the size of a w indow

\'V'hen you're working on a document on your desktop, it's great to
have a wide-open window so you can really see what's the re. But
small windows also have advantages. You can move small windows
around on your desktop to see the conte nts of more than one
window at a time. Large or small, to change a window's size, you use
the size box in the bottom-right corner of the window.

- The tutorial 37
 Ill!
Tn

Figure 2-12

-
Using the size box

1. Position the pointer on the size box, and drag it up and to

the left.
As you drag, a dotted outline follows. The farLher ro the left you
drag, the narrower the outline becomes; the farther upward you
drag, the shorter it becomes. When the outline is as small as you
can make it, it stops moving. When you re lease the mouse
button, the window changes size.
The contents of the window don't change at all when you change
a window's size. The only thing that changes is how much you can
see.

2. Position the pointer on the zoom box and click .

The window zooms our ro nearly fill the screen.

3. Click the zoom box again.

The window returns to its former size. Using the zoom box lets
you use every square inch of Lhe screen for what you're currently
working on and, with a single click, brings you back to your
former view.

-
38 Chapte r 2: Learning About Your Macintosh II
 Experime nt with controlling the size of the System Tools window.
Drag the size box down and to the right to make the window bigger
again. Then try all different lengths and widths. Use the zoom box
and notice how the Macintosh II always shrinks the window back

- down to whatever size it was before you zoomed it out.

Moving a window
You can move windows on your desktop just as you moved icons. To
move a window, drag it by its title bar. Don't, however, drag it by
the zoom box or the close box, the small box on the left in the title
bar. The close box is just for closing the window.

s f 1le I <111 ll1eu• Spec 1dl

-
- I
i

t......... .................................... ·······················-·····················-·-·--···----···-··

Figure 2- 13
Moving a window

1. Position the pointer anywhere on the title bar of the System

Tools window (except In the zoom or close box).

The tutorial 39
 2. Drag the System Tools window by pressing and holding down
the mouse button while you move the mouse.
Just as when you dragged icons, a dotted outline of the window
follows your movements. When you release the mouse button,
the window moves to the new location. -.
I
If you release the mouse button before you have the window
where you want it, just "pick the window up" again. If you change
your mind about moving it, cancel the drag by moving the
pointer into the menu bar and releasing the mouse button. Just as
icons stayed within the limits of the desktop, so do windows. You
can't lose them by dragging too far.
i I

Practice your new skills. When you can manipulate the window
easily, making it any size and putting it anywhere you want on (or
partially ofO the desktop, go on to the next activity.

Opening another icon ~

I

Use your new window-handling expertise to get the System Tools

window out of the way if you need to. Shrink it down and move it
around so you can see the Trash icon.

1. Select the Trash Icon (by clicking it).

2. Choose Open from the File menu.

Position the pointer on the menu title, press the mouse button
and drag to the Open command, and then release the mouse
button.
A second window appears on the desktop, probably overlapping
the first (depending on where you left the first window and what
size you made it).

Making a window active

With Macintosh, you can have many windows on your desktop at a
time. When there's more than one window, the Macintosh II needs
to know which one you're working on at the moment so that the
commands you choose and the text you type end up in the right
place. The window you're working on is always in front of all the
others. It's called the active window, the place you want the next
action to happen.

40 Chapter 2: Learning About Your Macintosh II

-
I .
 The active window's title bar is highlighted with narrow horizontal
lines on either side of the title. The active window also usually has a
size box in the bottom-right corner and scroll bars on the right side
and on the bottom.

a File Edit LJ1 ew S11 P< 1a l

Sys t ern TOOi$

=o Trash
0 it•ms

Active window--------+-

Figure 2-14
Overlapping windows

When you opened the Trash icon, it automatically became the

active, frontmost window-the window you're working in. The
System Tools window is also open on the desktop, but it's no longer
the active window. To work in the System Tools window again, you
make it active by clicking anywhere inside it.
If you left the System Tools window small before you opened the
Trash window, it may be completely hidden by the Trash window
now. You know how to move windows and change their size, so if
you can't see the System Tools window, move the Trash window or
change its size until you can see the System Tools window again. It
doesn't have co be completely visible. As long as you can see part of
it, you can make it active.

The tutorial 41
 1. Click In the System Tools window.
The window is brought to the front of the desktop. Its title bar is
highlighted, and scroll bars and a size box appear to show it's the
active window. Whenever you want to work in a window that isn't
already active, you first make it active by clicking in it.

a I 1le Edit llleui Special

System Tool s
n
4 Hems 537K in disk

LJ
UtiHHe-s f'oldtr • h

-
Figure 2- 15
Making a window active

Your desktop might not look exactly like the one here. You r
Macintosh II does exactly what you tell it to do; the size and
position of your windows are up to you.

2. Click In the Trash window.

Now it moves in front of the System Tools window again.

Experiment with arranging your desktop-making each window

active in turn, changing its size, and moving it.
•:• Hint:· Sometimes you need to move a window in order to see its
size box. And you sometimes need to change a window's size,
or move it, to see a window it's covering.

42 Chapter 2: Learning About Your Macintosh II

 Opening other icons
Yo u can open icons in a directory window, such as the System
Tools window, just as you opened icons on the desktop . You know

-
how Lo ope n an icon by selecting it and choosing O pen from the
File me nu. The re's a shortcut: you can do the same thing with a
technique called double-clicking. Try it to open the System Folde r
in the System Tools window. (If necessary, first make the Trash

- window smaller; then make the System Tools window active and
large e nough that the Syste m Folder icon is visible.)

1. Position the pointer on the System Folder, and quickly press

and release the mouse button twice.

t!l' lit Ill \p 'Cf<

15 itt ms 537K tn disk 242K availabl•

ee~~~
- S~ sltm Finder lmagtWriler Scrapbook Fil•Clipboard File

- "•

- Figure 2 - 16
Opening an Icon in a w indow

Ins ide the Syste m Folder are icons that represent system files;
these contain information the Macintosh II needs.
If the System Folder window doesn't appear w he n you double-
click, shorte n the interval be tween your clicks. That way the
Macintosh II will be able to interpre t you r actions as a double-
click, and not just as separate sing le clicks. Now you have two
ways to open icons.

- The tutorial 43
 2. Open the Utilities Folder, either by double-clicking It or by
selecting It and choosing Open from the Fiie menu.
See ·using the Hard Disk If necessary, first move the System Folder window. The Utilities
Installer· In Appendix A Folder contains icons that represent utility programs-system
and ·using the Installer· In
Chapter 3 for more tools you'll use later to set up your internal hard disk (if your
information on haw to use system includes that option) and to install printers and tmml I

these utility programs. Macintosh II system software on other disks.

Closing a window
You can have as many as 12 windows open on your desktop, but to
keep things tidy, you might want to close some when you're finished
working on them, and open them again when you need them.

1. Make the Trash window active by clicking In It.

2. Choose Close from the File menu.

-
I Page Setup ...
I Print Catalog... ter," iH

!_~ _ ......;j~~·;···················. ··············;;·· ~ _ ---ll_t1.l!:'-Lf'_'>_ FoJ_cJgr

~. _ _ _ __
~~::____ - - · - - ~ 11<1\ll c=-;:=::__ - - _-- -~ _---tJ= 1:, ;•i,ti ..
- - - - - - - - - - --- ---- -- --- -

1-t
' '
Figure 2-17
Choosing Close

The window collapses back to an icon. Whenever you choose

Close from the File menu, the frontmost, active window is
closed, and the next window behind it becomes active. ~
I I

44 Chapter 2: Learning About Your Macintosh II

 Now close the Utilities Folder window by using another shortcut.
The close box in the title bar lets you close an active window with a
single click.

3. Make the Utilities Folder window active if It's not already.

4. Click the c lose box.

It's the same as choosing Close from the File menu .

• Fil e Ecl1t Ll1ew Spec aal

~:1
Sy s t e m Fo lcl e1
15 ne-ros 53-7t In tll;~ :..i;::~ av•1lablt>

t' 8J 8J
51Jst~m
~
.
8J
Sys tern Tools
RI
= J.
•
J i tem$ 5!.7r u d1sJ 242l, ava1lable

Close box I ~ ··
StJSfem f oJ.:1.,., AL
Utililles Folder ·
Tros~

0:
~ ~ 1tems S37K m d1si.. 242f •v• •l•ble

!Qj
~ ~
C=:J
Appl• HD SC S •t up
LJ
Installer' Senpts
'
lrist.aller"
lQ:
c;JI J9 12.J
LL .... v
"""'
Figure 2-18
Using the close box

Using the scroll bars to see more

Windows on the desktop often can't show you the entire directory or
document all at once, even when you 've made the window very
large. There's often more information than can fit in the window at
one time.

The tutorial 45
 The scroll bars in an active window let you move what's in the
i
window so you can see more of iL

l. Make the System Folder window active if it isn't already .

2. Make the System Folder window small enough that some of

the icons are hidden from view.

3. Click the scroll arrow that points down.

More icons come into view. You can also scroll up, right, or lefL
You can also scroll by dragging the box in the scroll ba r.

Figure 2-19
Scrolling a document
s
§0
f 1le ld1 t ll1eu•

=
Spec ldl

Sy\tem Folde1
-
i

Figure 2-20
Using scro ll arrows

46 Chapter 2: Learning About Your Macintosh II

 If you want to know more 4. Drag the box in the vertical scroll bar to the top of the scroll
about scroll bars. see bar and release the mouse button.
·scrolling· in Chapter 3.
Nothing in the window moves until you release the mouse button.

- s Fite Edit ll1eui Special

mm

-
- Figure 2-21
Using the scroll box

Using applications
You might be wondering what all of this has to do with your
work- the documents you'll create with Macintosh applications.
You 'll use the skills you just learned in nearly all applications. You
usually select information and choose commands in consistent
ways. And windows are always opened and closed, changed in size,
moved, and made active by using the same techniques you just
learned.

The tutorial 47
 In addition to helping you manage your documents-copying
them, renaming them, removing them, for example-the Finder
lets you start applications and get documents, and then put your
doruments away when you're finished working on them.

Starting an application
In this section, you'll learn how to start up an application and use
that application to create a new document.
Most of the applications you'll use with the Macintosh II come on
their own disks. The application you'll use in the next few
Startup disks contain the sections-TeachText-is already on the System Tools disk, the disk
system files-at least you used to start this tutorial. (You'll also find TeachText on the
Finder and System-that
the Open Macintosh Utiltlies disk.) Like the System Tools disk, most application disks can
needs to start itself. be startup disks.
Usually you just insert the application disk into the disk drive and
switch on the computer. If your system includes a hard disk, you can
make it a startup disk and copy the application onto the hard disk.
That way, you won't have to insert any disk to start up the computer.
(See Appendix A for the details after you finish this tutorial.) fllllllt
1

•!• Copy-protected disks: Some application manufacturers copy

protect their disks. That means you can't make another copy of
the disk. But most copy-protected applications can be used with
a hard disk. The application's manual should explain how.

1. Close the System Folder window if you haven't done so

already.

2. Make the System Tools window larger, if necessary, to see

the TeachText Icon.
Use the technique you learned earlier for changing the size of a
~
window. I •

3. Open the TeachText icon. either by double-clicking it or by

selecting It and choosing Open from the File menu.
You see the TeachText screen-an empty window ready for you
to type in some text. · _,
I !

48 Chapter 2: Learning About Your Macintosh II

 • fill' fd ll

r""'I

~
Close box

Menus Y/
Ii /
Untitled -0~

f!:!.

Title ba r

Scroll ba r
I
~

Size box
I
~fi:11211
~

- Figure 2-22
TeachText screen

- For now, you'll use TeachText as a sample application to learn how

to use applications. You 'll learn about other ways to use TeachText

- later in this tutorial.

Like most applications, TeachText has its own menus, title bar,
close box, size box, and scroll bar. Also like most applications,
TeachText always opens with an "Untitled" window. You create
whatever you want with the application and then name the
document when you save it.

Creating a new document

Now that you've started TeachText, you need to use the keyboard to
create a new document. The Macintosh II keyboard, similar to a
typewriter keyboard is used mainly for typing text and numbers. On
the screen, a blinking vertical bar marks the insertion point where
text you type will be inserted. If you make a mistake, use the Delete
key to erase and then sta rt typing again. You don't have to use the
Return key to siart a new line. 1he application starts new lines for
you.

The tutorial 49
 ~
I

• Use the keyboard to type this sample paragraph:

The following is my best guess for a production
schedule. Please keep in mind that it is
subject to change once reality gets underway.
Let me know if I'm cheating anyone of the time
he or she needs, or if I'm not allowing for
black holes.
Most applications that let you enter and edit text-such as word
processing applications-start the new lines for you. This feature is
word wraparound, so called because if a word is too long to fit at
the end of a line, the word wraps around to the next one
automatically.
You'll have a chance later to learn more about adding and editing
text, but now you need to give the document a name and save it on
the disk.

Saving your work on a disk

With most applications, the work you do at your keyboard is stored
~
as you do it in a special area of the computer's memory, where it I I

stays temporarily until you save it on a disk, start another

application, or turn off your computer. Saving the information on
a disk makes a permanent record of what you've done-a file you
can duplicate, modify, print, and so on. If you don't save your work
on a disk but do change applications or tum off the computer, any
work that was in the computer's memory will simply be erased; you
will not have a permanent record of what you did. Sometimes that's
appropriate, but be sure you understand the implications of saving
or not saving your work.

1. Choose Save from the File menu.

A dialog box appears. Whenever your Macintosh II needs more ~.
information from you, it presents a dialog box with buttons to
click, such as OK or Cancel, and sometimes with a place for you
to type additional information. Dialog boxes can also alert you if
you're about to do something that could cause you to lose
information; they give you a chance to cancel what you were
about to do. When the messages are alerting you, they're often
accompanied by an Alert Sound.

50 Chapter 2: Learning About Your Macintosh II

 The dialog box that appears now gives you the chance to save
your document on any disk. This time, you'll save your
document directly on the System Tools disk, without placing it
inside a folder. (For now, just ignore the list of files in the dialog

- box window.)
There's a text box for you to type the name of your docume nt.

T• ,>? roll ~ 1n9 1·; mrJ best ']"e·--; '' , , r· 1 J1J t1 n ·t1>'d•1le Pl>?a e f o:-c-p 1n
rrP1d'rit t1~11c1e1 t 1.,,~~ r ,., ,,• 'J;"' ud~r J'~ L•trref11ow11
ti:ojlJ 1 q.jnqnne 11 fht'l r -:t . . . r· i, 1 1r II 1 n r.11 i:l ) ... ng1or
t "c ,1\1" I I[g} Sys t e m Tool s I
D Sys t em Folder p::! [g} System To ...
<)I l°<!<I< hfrH t
D Upda t e Fo lder [ Ejec t J
D Utilities Folder !lril•e

Dialog box w lndow- - - - - - - + - - - ---tt

Saue

Can ce l

- Figure 2-23
A dialog box

- 2. Type Fi r s t

3. Click the Save button.

Memo.

Your document is saved on the disk just as it appears on the

screen. After the Macintosh II saves the document, it returns you
to the document window. Now the title bar shows the name you
just gave to the document.
Once you've given your document a name , if you continue
working on it, make a habit of choosing the Save command from
the File menu about every 15 minutes or so. (It's a good thing to
do while you're waiting for your next inspiration.) That way, if
your Macintosh II gets switched off or there's a power failure,
you 'll never lose more than 15 mi nutes' worth of work.

The tutorial 51
 With your work saved on the disk, you can quit TeachText and return
to the Finder.

4. Choose Quit from the File menu.

The desktop appears again. But now the icon of your new
document appears in the System Tools window.

a File ld1t L11eu• Specia l

1 • •. t.· ••

Figure 2-24
New document Icon

This new icon represents the document you created, and below it is
the name you gave it. All documents you create have a specific icon
related to the application you used to create them. This helps you
identify which application you used to create each of your
documents. When you work on this document again, you'll select
and open its icon just like any other icon.

Editing text
Now you know how to create and save a document. In this section,
you'll use your first Macintosh memo to learn how to make changes
to what you've just written.

52 Chapter 2: Learning About Your Macintosh II

 1. Open the First Memo Icon.
Opening the document you want to work on also starts the
application you need to do the work. You don't have to open the
application in order to open the document; once a document
has been saved, you can open it directly from the Finder (and it
will automatically open the application).
The TeachText application starts, and the document you saved
earlier reappears, just as it was when you saved it.

2. Select a new Insertion point by clicking In front of the word

subject.

~O Firs t Memo
Tile tollc"'':rng"t1rn1d tie;t gue;·; r1:ir- .; pn1:J1.1>:t. 1c11· >chedule Please f et-P 111
:r11•11J 1.l'1·'lr. 1t is ;ubJe i:t. to cl 1an9i;- once reol1ty 1~ ets unde1·way Le t rne f now 11
rr c1-1t-at1nq an1Jone of u·1e tHne t·ie i:ir ·::.tie· eecs or 1f J m not all ov·nng for
td .J( t 1·1i:1 h;i;.

- Figure 2-25
TeachText document

You're moving the insertion point to where you want to add text.

3. Type not.
What you type appears at the insertion point. (Don't forget to
add a space after not.) You probably noticed that when you
added text, the words on the other lines rewrapped to
accommodate the extra word.
Now you'll select some text and move it to another part of the
document.

The tu torial 53
 4. Select the entire second sentence by positioning the pointer
after the period that follows the word schedule and dragging
to the end of the sentence.

.. .. __
--- ---
Figure 2-26
Selecting text

First drag down, and then drag to the right. (Be sure you include
the period at the end of the sentence.) If you move the pointer
off the sentence, you might select more than just the sentence. If
this happens, just start dragging over again; nothing unexpected
can happen while you're just selecting text.
When you drag through text, you're selecting information to
work on, as you did when you selected icons. You selected icons
by clicking them; you select text by dragging across it or down
through lines of text.

5. Choose Cut from the Edit menu.

The sentence vanishes. Whenever you choose Cut or Copy from
the Edit menu, whatever you cut or copy is put in a holding place
called the Clipboard, ready for you to p aste to a d ifferent
location if you want. (You use Copy when you just want to copy
text, rather than move it somewhere else. Copy works just like
Cut, except it leaves the text you selected in the document.)

6. Select a new insertion point by clicking after the period that

follows the word holes.

54 Chapter 2: Learning About Your Macint osh II

- s Fri e Edi t
~Fust "1emo
·er .1 pro:! ··• )r :~e11ulo> L,;' in,;~ 11n
r .r~ r..,.~d' r 11 I r t ,p

Figure 2 -27
Moving the Insertio n point

7. Choose Paste from the Edit menu.

See ·Editing Text" In The contents of the Clipboard-in this case, the sentence you
Chapter 3 for a summary just cut-are pasted into the location you selecced.
of how to enter and edit
t ext.
s I 1lr Ed1l

I ~ Please keep 1n rni no t hat 1t ts not subject to change onc e r ea l i t y ge t s

I un+jerw ayj

L
Figure 2-28
Pasting in text

The contents stay on the Clipboard until you choose Cut or Copy
again, so you can continue to paste them. You can paste within
one document or between two documents created with the same
application. The contents also stay on the Clipboard when you
leave an application, so you can cut and paste between
applications.
For example, you can draw a picture with MacPaintTM and use it to

- jazz up a report you create with MacWrite™. O r borrow a passage

from a MacWrite documenc and paste it into an overhead slide
you're preparing with MacDraw™.

Whether you're using the Finder or anothe r application, you can

usually view the contents of the Clipboard. (Some applications
provide a menu selection fo r this.)

- The tutorial 55
 Saving a document with a different name
Now that you've edited your original memo, you need to save your
revision. When you're finished making changes to a document, you
have two choices for saving. You can choose Save from the File
menu, and the revised document is saved with the same name you
gave the original. That's fine if you don't want to keep a separate
copy of the original document; but you may want to save the
revision and keep the original, too. (For example, you may have a
form letter that you keep as an original; you can personalize the
letter and save different versions with new names.) For that you
choose Save As from the File menu.

1. Choose Save As from the File menu.

A dialog box appears. (lt's the same one you saw when you· .-.
named your first memo.) The name of the original document
appears highlighted in the text box.

e~--£dit
,....
l-011e t11ll11,·11nq 1·:rn1d t:e=t. ,~u~:.·:'i/i~js~~r~j~1~t~1~1n :i:l'11?1jule LH rw: I nJJ\·1 Ji;~·~::: I
I

1 l1.c.1trn•J .1n1dc1r1•? i:ii u·1e t.1rne IH? or· ·:.t·1e nee•l:-. •:ir· 1r 1·m not .:illo·l'.'lr11J tor t1L:ii:f ~
t11:il.o: F·1e.3:.e 1i:.i:•p1n n-11·1i:J 1.1'1at. 1t. 1·:. not ·:utiJ>:-d t_,:i 1:t·1.:inqe onci:- r""·::l1f1J 1y•t.·=.

Iigi System Tools I

D first M<mrn IQ jg) System To •••
c::i System Folder
~ l'(~(I( hh~Ht Eject
c::i Update Folder
c::i Utilities Folder

Saue this document as: Saue

• I
Cancel

-.
Figure 2-29
I

Save As dialog box

You can edit the names of documents just as you would other text.
(If you want, you can just type a new name for the document rather
than edit the old one.)

,.... I

56 Chapter 2: Learning About Your Macintosh II ,..

I I
I
 2. Position the pointer at the beginning of the word First a nd
drag to the end of the word to se lect it.

3. Type Second.

"lmJI [ dil
r 1nt Memo
Ttoe following 1s my Dest guess ro1 a pr·c·:lu t 11 n chedul., Let mi:- I now 11 Im
cheating anyone 01 l11e t11ne he or sl1e nP~1j· or 11 Im 11ot allo "11119 101· Olocl
M
. toles Ple~se ~ "ep rn mind 1.11.~t 1t 1; r., • 1bJt? · t ... ch.;1 1e Jnc<: rfol1t1,1 9e1.s
•inde1·way
J (g} System Tools I
D f'irsl M<mw ~ (g} System To ...
D System Folder
<;>! fo<1( h'f Put ( Eject I
D Up date Fol der
D Ut ili ties Fo l der
( Brit•<! I
Q
Sa 11e t his docume nt as: [ Sa11eiµ
ISeco n~ Memo I ( Cancel l
In"
Qi

Figure 2·30
Changing a d ocument's name

4. Click the Save button .

You've saved the revised memo w ith a new name,·and you return
to the docume nt you just renamed. Notice that the title bar
changes again to show the name you just gave the revised memo.

s f ile Edit
O Second Memo E!li!
The following is my best guess f or a production schedul e. Let me know i f l'mJQI
chea ting anyone of the ttme he or she needs , or if I'm not allow ing for bl ack

r holes. Please k eep in mind tha t it is not subject to change once reality gets
underw ayj

Figure 2·3 1
Document w ith its new title

The tutoria l 57
 5. Choose Quit from the Fiie menu.
You return to the desktop, where you see an icon for the revised
memo with the name you just gave it.

Organizing documents
You've seen how to use the Finder to start an application and open a
document, save it, and quit the application to return to the Finder.
The Finder also helps you organize your documents-group them
together with related documents, duplicate them, rename them,
copy them to another disk, or throw them away.

Using folders
You'll soon accumulate many documents on the disks you'll be
using. At some point, you might want to arrange your desktop so
that related documents are grouped together. Macintosh folders
work just like ordinary file folders to help you organize your
documents. For instance, you can keep all your monthly status
reports together in one folder. Or you can group all your MacPaint
illustrations together, or keep each one with the report it illustrates.
Macintosh lets you organize your documents however you want
them.
You already have three folders on the System Tools disk. To
organize your own work, you have an endless supply of empty
folders.

1. Start a new folder by choosing New Folder from the File -. I

menu.
A folder named Empty Folder appears in the System Tools
window.

t-i
• I

58 Chapter 2: Learning About Your Macintosh II

~
I
I
 ti File [dil Uiew Special

Sy~ tern Tool~ ==

7 tlt_•rtH

Figure 2-32
Starting a new folder

The empty folder is automatically selected when you create it, so

you can rename it just by typing. (If you can't see the entire icon,
you can make the window larger or move the icon.)
If you already have a folder named Empty Folder on the desktop,
the folder you create will be named Copy ofEmpty Folder.

2. Type Memos Fo1der and press Return.

Here you press Return to confirm your new folder name. Empty
Folder is renamed Memos Folder.
Usually you have to click icons you want to rename. This prevents
inadvertently renaming selected icons when you don't really
want to. But you don't have to click newly created folders to
rename them.
You can also select, cut, and paste the icon names, just as you
would other text. Usually, however, when you want to rename an
icon, it's easier just to select the icon and replace the old name
by typing a new one.

The tutorial 59
 3. Drag the two document Icons to the Memos Folder Icon,
releasing the mouse button when the Memos Folder Is
highlighted.

a File £d1t ll1euo Sp ec1dl

IJ • .. T
-
-
-
>T t

i
Figure 2-33
Tr e t

-
Dragging a document to a folder

\'V'hen you cover the folder icon with the outline of each
document icon, the folder icon is highlighted. You "drop" the
document icons into the folder by releasing the mouse button.
The folder icon is no longer highlighted, and your docu ment
icons disappear into the folde r.

4. Open the Memos Folder icon.

You see the icons that represent your two documents.

60 Chapter 2: Learning About Your Macintosh II

-
- • File Cdit Ll1ew Speual

Memos Folder E!L

2 Hems 538K in disk 241 K a vailable

E1 E1
f ;rst Memo ~teond Mtmo

-- .... - .... __
-- ----
-- ---- ..
Figure 2-34
Memos Folder opened

r When you drag a document icon to a folder, you 'file the document
there. You can also drag an icon into an open folder window; the
result is the same.

Nesting folders
Large-capacity disks-especially ha rd disks-can ho ld hundreds of
documents and folders. At some point, you may find it helpful to
place folders within other folders to keep your work organized. For
example , you may want to keep an application and all the
documents you created with it in one folder. (You can put
applications in folders, too.)

1. Close the Memos Folder window if it's not already closed.

2. Choose New Folder from the File menu.

You see an empty folder in the System Tools window.

3. Name the new folder by typing TeachText Folder

and pressing Return.

4. Put the Memos Folder Icon and the TeachTexf Icon info the
TeachText Folder.
Use the technique you just learned for placing documents in
folde rs.

The tutorial 61
 5. Open the TeachText Folder.
You see both the TeachText application icon and the Memos
Folder in the TeachText Folder window.

D Teo chTeHI Folde r

2 items 538K in disk 241 K available

TeachTe-x t Memos Folder

-- --
Figure 2-35
TeachText Fo lder opened

6. Open the Memos Folder.

a File Edit U1ew Special

-D Memos Folder
2 items 538K in disk 24 IK av ailable

first Memo Second Memo

~

I I I

Figure 2-36
Layers of w indows

62 C hapter 2: Learning About Your Macintosh II

 Notice that each folder has its own window. The active window is
the folder you just opened. (But you can still change the active
window by clicking anywhere in another window.)

7. Close the Memos Folder and then the TeachText Folder.

As you close each folder's window, it collapses back into its icon
in the previous window, until you reach the System Tools
window.
Placing folders within folders is called nesting. You can
continue nesting folders as deep as you want, but most people
find that retrieving documents and applications nested more
than four levels becomes tedious. Fortunately, you won't
misplace them; you can find any application, document, or
folder by using Find File, a desk accessory designed to help you
keep track of the contents of large-capacity disks. (See "Using
Find File" in Chapter 3 and "Find File" in Chapter 4.)
When you nest folders, you create a hiera rchy. When all of the
folders on a disk are closed and the disk's directory window is
open, you're looking at the top level of the hierarchy. When you
open a folder on the top level, its directory window shows you the
second level of the hierarchy.

8. Open the TeachText Folder.

You see the second level.

s file £d1t lhew Sp eu a l

Teo chTewt Folder

2 ittms 538K in disk 24 IK av• ilabl•

~ D
Tt•chTtx t Memos Folder

...__ . .
Figure 2-37
Second level of the file hierarchy

If there's a folder in that second level-in this case, the Memos

Folder-when you open it, you see the third level, and so on.

The tutorial 63
 9. Open the Memos Folder.
You see the third level of the hierarchy- the two memos.

s File £d1t ll1ew Special

=o Memos Folder
2 items S38K in disk 241 K avail•bl•

B B
Firs t Memo Second Memo
~

Figure 2-38
Third level o f the file hierarchy

Working in the hierarchical file system

When you're working with an application, moving around in the
hierarchical file system would be tedious (and confusing) if you
n
had to quit the application and use the Finder to go back and forth
through all those folder windows whenever you wanted to open a
new document. Fortunately, you can open and save documents
within an application.

1. Close the Memos Folder if it's not already closed.

2. Open the TeachText icon.

3. Close the Untitled window.

Either click the close box or choose Close from the File menu.
You don't want to start a new document right now.

4. Choose Open from the File menu.

You see the following dialog box.

64 Chapter 2: Learning About Your Macintosh II

 Directory title _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _lriiiiii~!r
~:sl~-T~e~il~c§hT~eiuitifioiltileir~I-~
I ••W:!J.d.(it!lrji§ u-j (Ej Sy \ le m To ol\

- .i
'I

:
I

I
I r~[~,

::::-- o ~
---=:J Ii

l :nJ =-I ii~

Figure 2-39
Dialog box for the Open command

A directory title shows you the name of the folder you're

presently working in-in this case, the TeachText Folder. The
box beneath it shows you all the other items in the TeachText
Folder you can open with this application-in this case, only the
Memos Folder.

5. To open the Memos Folder, click the Open button.

As you open the Memos Folder, you move down through the
hierarchy. The directory title changes to remind you where you
are in the hierarchy, and the box shows you what's on the level
you just moved to-in this case, the two documents in the
Memos Folder. The selected document is the one that will open
when you click Open. If you want to open the other document,
click anywhere on the other document's name to select it, and
then dick Open.

Directory title 1 "2.1 "'ie mo\ Folde1J

Items you can open l•iiijji@i§11C. ui IZi Syst e m Tool\
D Second Memo
I [ £ject )
[ )
I
Open button ' O pe n~]
~ [ Cil nc e l )
I ; r.
'

Figure 2-40
The next level in the hierarchy

The tutorial 65
 If you want to open a document that's located somewhere else in
the hierarchy, you can move to another level by using the pull-
down list below the directory title.

6. Position the pointer on the directory title, and press and

hold down the mouse button.

---~I

• I I I'

ed esi Teuchle t Folder lllf.r! :z sys tern Tool\

, 0 Sec (g) System Tools · [ 'I

I, , ( Eject J
,.- -J
, _ ---

r-----,
,.r... [ ilfll el I

Figure 2-41
Directory hierarchy

This pull-down list is similar to the menus you used earlier,

except rather than showing commands, this shows the path
through the hierarchy back to the top level. (The top level is
always the last one on the list.)

7. Choose the TeachText Folder.

You choose the level you want by dragging down the list to get to
it.
The directory title changes again, and you see the contents of
the TeachText Folder in the box-the Memos Folder.

8. Pull down the list below the directory title again and
choose System Tools.
The directory title changes again, and you see the folders on the ~
top level of the hierarchy-in this case, the System Folder, the
TeachText Folder, the Utilities Folder, and the Update Folder.

-..
' i

66 Chapter 2: Learning About Your Macintosh II

 So far, all you've seen in the window are folders and the documents
you can open with TeachText. When you open a document from
within an application, the dialog box shows you only folders and
documents that you can open with that application. If you open a

- folder and you don't see anything listed in the window, that's
because that folder doesn't contain anything you can open with the
application you're using.
You've been moving through the hierarchy on the System Tools
disk. For now, you'll work only on this disk, but if you wanted to
open a document on another disk, you could see what's on the other
disk by clicking the Drive button on the right side of the dialog box.
(If you don't have a disk in another drive, the Drive button appears
dimmed.) When you click the Drive button, you see the name of the
disk change in the top-right corner of the dialog box, and you see
the folders and documents on the top level of that disk in the
window.
If you have a one-drive system, or if you just want to switch disks in a
disk drive, you can click the Eject button. This ejects the disk from
the drive and lets you insert another disk. The new disk's name
appears in the top-right corner of the dialog box, along with its
folders and documents in the window.
Now open one of the memos.

9. Open the TeachText Folder.

1O. Open the Memos Folder.

11. Open either of the two memo documents.

You use a similar technique in moving through the hierarchy
when you save a document.

12. Choose Save As from the File menu.

You don't need to make any changes to the document. Right
now, you just want to save a version of the document with a
different name.

The tutorial 67
 You see the familiar Save/Save As dialog box.

rr===============================;i
;a "1emos Folder I
f6j Syslem To ...

[ JPC I

Orwe j
j -
Saue lhrs document as~

Figure 2-42
Save As dialog box

13. Type Third Memo.

This time, before clicking the Save button, you'll choose a
different level of the hierarchy to save the document on.

14. Pull down the list below the directory title and choose the
TeachText Folder.

T
OJ Memos Fotc11\:
I
-.i""IUI!lililr:P.I•I'"• '
C5J system To ots ~161 System To... I
II ( [jecl i
!nl ( Orwe J

~-----------'
Sdt•e this document as: ( Sa11 p )

i._
T_h 1_1 c_l _"1_P-=-m-=-~==-----'' Qdi1(iIJ
- -=
Figure 2-43
Choosing TeachText Fo lder

You see the contents of the TeachText folder-the TeachText

application and the Memos folder. The d irectory title changes
again to show you whe re you are in the hierarchy.

68 Chapter 2: Learning About Your Macintosh II

 Whe n you're saving a document, you see in the window all the
applications, folders, and documents on the same level. Seeing
everything gives you a chance to make sure you're not saving this
document with the same name as something else that's already
there. That way, you won't inadvertently lose anything by using
the same name.

15. Cilek the Save button.

You saved the new docume nt in the TeachText Folder.

16. Choose Save As from the Fiie menu.

!~ TedchTeHt folder l
CJ ~emo~ Folder

CJec t

\dt•e thr~ document a\:

Figure 2-44
Changing a document's name

Again, you see the dialog box. This time, you see the name of
the document you just saved listed in the window along with the
other ite ms in the TeachText Folde r. Now you have me mos
saved at two differe nt levels of the hierarchy-one at the second
level in the TeachText Folder, and two at the third level in the
Memos Folder.

17. Because you aren't going to save anything, click the

Cancel button.

18. Choose Close from the File menu.

You're finished with this docume nt.

- The tuto rial 69

 Selecting more than one icon
You've learned a lot about organizing your work, but there's more.
So far, whatever action you've taken has been on one document at a
time. You can also take most actions on several documents at once.
For example, you can move several documents from one place to
another, discard them in the Trash, or find out information about
them. One of the ways to select more than one icon is by using the
dragging technique.

1. Close the TeachText Folder window If It's not already closed.

(You'll need a window with lots of icons.)
- I

2. Open the System Folder.

3. Use the size box or the zoom box to make the window
bigger so that you'll have plenty of room.

4. Position the pointer outside one corner of a group of Icons In

the window, and drag diagonally to the opposite corner of
the group.
As you drag, a dotted rectangle appears around the icons you're
selecting. When you release the mouse button, the icons are
selected. You can select any group of icons that can be enclosed
in a rectangle. Be sure you start dragging outside an icon. If you
position the pointer on an icon, you select just that icon.

~
I

70 Chapter 2: Learning About Your Macintosh II ~

, I
-
-

- Figure 2-45
Selecting a group of Icons

Now you can drag the whole group.

5. Position the pointer on one of the icons, and drag the whole
group to another part of the window.

-
Make sure the pointer is on one of the icons. (It doesn't matter
which one.) They keep their arrangement and move "in
formation." The icons stay selected until you click anywhere
outside any of them.

- You can also choose a command to act on a group of selected

icons. For example, you can find out information about an entire
group of docume nts.

-
- The tutorial 71
 6. C hoose Get Info from the File menu.
An information window appears for each icon that's selected.
As each new window appears on the desktop, it overlaps the
window that appeared before it

• f Ill' (clit U1eui Spec 1al

.~

~:!O
LD.Lc._ Lo.Lo..
Info { Info

~
Lock•d i O Locl•l • D
r;nder F l.t,l!'r rl''="r"

Kind : system fil• Kind .j IJn':•f1 f

~Siu : 65072 by tu, 64K on disk S1u• !;o::o tu~td ~8!"" 4n.J1s~

Y h• r• : Systtm Tools, interna1 ddvt VhPrP '$!f.ti'm T lr ·~'+rri:tl ,Jr 1 ..

Cr ut•d : Tue , Sep 23, 1986 11 :37 AM I Crr•tf'd •n ,..J:) :-: , ... ': .1 .1 7 ~fl

11odi fi•d : Sun, Nov 23, 1986 11 :07 PM Hod1f1 td •·J 0 t :: 1~;.,5 jQf11

f inder Version 5.4 ILH. ,. 1rlt•.•r v ..r .n;.n 3 4

'-I u~
~
Figure 2-46
Overlapping informa tion windows

You can move these information windows or make them active

like any other windows on the desktop, but you can't change their
size or scroll through them.
Software manufacturers sometimes use the comment box in the
information window to show the software's version number.
Applications and system software are often improved and
updated, and version numbers are assigned to these u pdates so
you can always see if you're using the most current version. Just
select the application's icon, and choose Get Info from the File
menu.

7. C lose ea c h Information window in turn by choosing Close

from the File menu or b y clicking the close box.
Each time you choose Close or click its close box, the active
window closes.

72 Chapte r 2: l earning About Your Macintosh II

 There's another way to select more than one icon. Sometimes the
icons you want to select aren't lined up in such a way that you can
drag a rectangle around them. If they're scattered about, you can
select more than one by Shift-clicking.
If any icons are still selected, first click outside any of them before
you select one again.

- 8. Select any icon by clicking it.

9. Hold down the Shift key on the keyboard, and click a second
Icon.
The second icon can be any icon in the same window. You can
even scroll to a different part of the window and Shift-dick.
You can continue to select more icons as long as you hold down
the Shift key when you click.

Any action you choose now will affect all the selected icons. You
can choose a command for them or move them by dragging the
whole group.

Changing your view

You can use the Finder's View menu to look at your documents in
different arrangements.

1. Choose the By Name command from the View menu.

The contents of the active window are arranged alphabetically by
name. You can also view them by date, by size, by kind, or with
small icons that give you more space in the directory window.

- 2. Choose the By Icon command from the View menu.

Now the items in the window are arranged the way they were when
you first started the system.

The tutorial 73
 Reading Read Me documents
Earlier in this tutorial, you used TeachText to learn how to start up
an application and create, edit, and save documents. But there's
another reason TeachText is included on the System Tools disk.
You can use TeachText to read Read Me documents-without
having to use a full-feature word processing application.
With TeachText, Apple Computer and other manufacturers can
include Read Me documents with new applications and hardware
products, or with updated versions of system software, to make sure
the information you get is as up-to-date as possible. (It's a lot faster
to create a document on a disk than it is to produce an insert for the
book!) And some applications and desk accessories may not need a
whole manual to teach you how to use them: the document may be
all you need to learn how to use the product.
When you get a new application or system software disk and see a
Read Me document on the disk, use TeachText to open the
document. You can read the document on the screen, or (if you
have a printer attached to your Macintosh II) you can print the
document so you have a copy of it on paper.
Now you'll use TeachText to read a Read Me document on the
System Tools disk.

1. Close the System Folder window if it's not already closed.

2. Open the Update Folder.

You see a Read Me document in the window.

...
I

74 Chapter 2: Learning About Your Macintosh II

 s File Edit llleui Speudl

Sy ~ tern Tool~
o ·••ms 111 d·:~ -~ ) 41):,tilf'

F- - ---, I
L- L__
::\l. '":"l"l'l F'
~o= Updote Folder ~E!l~
1 iltm 539K in disk 240K • v•il•ble

Jim a .
Read Mt
g

1-
,_
~
IQ1 p:;; 121

Figure 2-47
Read Me document Icon

3. Open the Read Me document.

This Read Me document gives you important information about
updating your application disks. You can read it now or come
back to it later when you've finished this tutorial.

- If you have a printer attached to your computer, you can print a

copy of the document. (Wait until you finish this tutorial.) See
"Printing" in Chapter 3 for instructions.

4. Close the Read Me document.

5. Choose Quit from the File menu.

6. Close the Update Folder to return to the desktop.

The tutorial 75
 Using a desk accessory
Macintosh desk accessories-the Alarm Clock and Calculator, for
example- are always available when you're on the Macintosh
desktop or in an application.
You choose desk accessories from the Apple menu on the far-left
side in the menu bar.

1. Choose Alarm Clock from the Apple menu.

The dock is displayed on the screen.

e-t- - - - Lever
n
-
9:38:-11 A"1

Figure 2-48
Alarm Clock

2. Click the "lever" on the right side of the clock.

The Alarm Clock expands to display and let you set whatever is
highlighted in the bottom panel-the time, date, or alarm.
-
!09:30:'19 n::tt
r= ll::38:5l A!'-1 I!
Time - - - - - 1'&

Figure 2-49
Alarm clock settings

See "Using Desk You can click the icon that represents what you want to set, and I.hen
Accessories· In Chapter 3 click the digits you want to change. Click the up arrow to advance the
and "Desk Accessories· In
Chapter 4 for descriptions numbers, or click the down arrow to go backward. Click in the top
of the other accessories in panel to set the clock.
the Apple menu.
To display just the Alarm Clock again, click the lever. When you're -
finished with the desk accessory, click its close box.

76 Chapter 2: Learning About Your Macintosh II

 Before you go
You're almost finished with this tutorial. Before you go, you may
want to drag TeachText from the folder you made earlier to the
System Tools window so you can fi nd it easily late r. If someone else
is like ly to use the System Tools disk and this tutorial after you , it
might be helpful to the next person if you drag the TeachText Folde r
to the Trash- but be sure to re move TeachText from the folder first!

Updating startup disks

At some point, you may need to update your other startup disks with
the system files on the System Tools disk so you can use them w ith
your Macintosh II. Some applications' startup d isks may have
earlie r ve rsions of Macintosh system software (the files in the
System Folde r). They may no t work on the Macintosh II until you
update the m. To update your startup disks, you use the I n s ta ller, a
utility program in the Utilities Folder on the System Tools dis k. To
find out if your startup disks need updating, you can check the
version numbers for the two files Finder and Syste m.
First check the Finder.

1. Choose Shut Down from the Special menu.

Your computer ejects the disk from the disk drive.

2. Insert the application's startup disk, and then press the

Power On key.

3. Choose About the Finder from the Apple menu.

A window will appear that tells you the version number of the
Finder o n that disk. (The lower the number, the earlier the
version.) The Finder should be version 5.4 or later.

Now check the Syste m file.

4. Click anywhere In the window to close the window.

5. Open the application disk's icon if it's not alre ady open.

- Updating startup d isks 77

 ...,
6. Open the System Folder.
' '

7. Select the System icon, and choose Get Info from the File ~
I
menu.
Most application disks include the version number of the System
file in the comment box in the information window. If you don't
see a version number in the comment box, check the manual that
came with the application. The System file should be version 4.0
or later.

If the application's Finder and System files are earlier versions, see
"Using the Installer" in Chapter 3 for step-by-step instructions on
updating the disk.

Important Once you update an application's startup disk. you will be able
to use the disk as a startup disk on most earlier models of the
Macintosh computer (the exception Is the Macintosh 128K). If
you plan to use the same application disk as a startup disk on
the Macintosh II and on an earlier model of Macintosh
computer, don't update the disk until you've read '"Startup
Disks· In Chapter 4. (Also be aware that some applications may
have compatibility problems with the new system software.)

I..,

78 Chapter 2: Learning About Your Macintosh II I~

 Starting your own work
You probably have some work you want to do on your Macintosh II.
I3ut first, if your system includes the internal hard disk, go now to
Appendix A, "Working With Hard Disks, " to get your hard disk set
up and running. If you'd like to know more about the Macintosh II
before you start using an application, read Chapter 4, "Macintosh II
Reference." Be sure to use the Installer to update each startup disk,
and then read the manuals that came with the applications you want
to use. When you want some reminders or more informalion aboU[
using the Finder to organize your work, come back to Chapter 3 of
this book, "Your Macintosh II Step by Step." Enjoy!

Starting your own work 79

 This chapter tells you how to perform specific tasks. It summarizes
the basic techniques you'll use whenever you work with your Apple
Macintosh II computer-from clicking and dragging to using the
desk accessories in the Apple menu. It also describes the steps to
take when you want to use the Pinder to manage your docume nts and
disks. For example, you'll read how to move a document fro m one
disk to another, how to copy a document or an entire disk, and how
to remove documents.

How to use this chapter

You don't have to read this chapter in any particular order; each
topic is independent of the others. When you want to know how to
do something (use the mouse, print or copy a docume nt, or
rename a folder, for example), go to the section on that topic.
There you'll find a brief, general discussion and step-by-ste p
instructions for performing specific tasks. Read the column labeled
for the task you want to perform and follow the steps, reading down
the column.

82 Chapter 3: Your Macintosh II Step by Step

- A frame of reference This chapter tells you in the most compact way possible how to
perform Macintosh tasks. Depending on your level of expertise,
you might need more detailed information than you' ll find here.
Nearly everything In this chapter is covered In greater depth in
Chapter 4, "Macintosh II Reference: Look in that chapter to
see how each of these topics fits into the Macintosh II' s big
picture.

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Major topic

General discussion

r--;::::======== step-by-step Instructions

for performing a task

You l,i)oC thc: ConLrol hOC'I 'When you dick the poin1et '° I OKk the Gcncnl w:ora 1f il I Clock the Cencnl icon if II I Oidr:lheGcncnlteund•
fmmlhc Applc:~to inw:ti ICU 1n a dorumenl, thc bn't aln:1dy tua,hll&hkd QI\' ..
~.ay .telr:c-1. un'I 1ll't.1dy xltck'd
penon:llae your compu~t lo lt\$ott\IOn pouw; bl4nb '° .... lbclhcKTOllbarJ~ry 2 To ~Ito• '"' IC
romut. d.ck 2 (l.ckct-~dlgiu)'()JWllVIO
fOUl WIY ol dotf'& &tWl.p ln ~~IOtcconthelCl'f!t'ft.
the Control PJ nd,, you s.tl«1
oCOtU 1tui rcprcxrW: pana ol
YOUI COl'llpuicr l}'Mem
Yw on~ the rueo/.u
b&i.nlut13 .....
10 bnng \he C~1l ic:on .nco

2 OK:k any bunun from 1 10 j ro

cllhct 12hl Of24 tv
} OdthcdWtsyo.i...antlO
ch.Inge, lhcn dick the: up or
ch.ti~ then dllCk I.he up tw
down lttOW 10 JCro0 Ilic
nutnbm higher or ~·
I Oidr;thc:Gcncnliconif11
Sc:ltthJ'\I an JCOn bnngt up a datrnunc 1he number ol down anuw &o acroll thc
un't alic1dy highhghlcd
bo• cl k aiuta ror )'OU to ll.mcl menu llCrN bl1nJ. nu~ hilhcr or k>wr.r
chOote a.-non.g. Ute the KTOll t»r U' nttCUJry
the Gc:ncnl icon lnlO
10 bnfi.1
If you dor\'I Wllt'I mcn..i •ttN
M.lkc ""' yc.u t,rp.iue ea<h oJ toblonk.doc::kOO
~ ILW.IP Q$b IO ~....: thc
a.r.m::nt Control PUie&. 2 . Cd any buaon rrom Slow "1
l"l.M IOxtlhc~atwhoch~
See -control Panel" in OCLck (or dna lhrou~ doo
vt:tticalburn.arkinglhe
0up&cf4fOt~ lo du~ them frorn bl.IQ to
inf0tmat10n, ..~orwioe'~mi
iNcn.ton poinc blinks.
o<lick the while "mrnu bu"
in lhc miniJIUrc dokklp lo
t« a umple patk:m. (et.ck
OftiJw-ngl'lllOtiec"thenc.ll
pt.can,c:t.dr: onthekftcolott
the: precedlnc p.ntitm>
oSct the pattern br ddlflA
the trUnbf\lrt <bktep bdow
1heM'il.e:b11.
O With I C~ monl«w,
dunac\hccoac.olthc:dcu
in the: pa~m by ackdMic the:
dOUuid~oncotlhc
~ colon in IN: cob bir
To chooK dJJe~ c:okn,
doubk--didc on a <dot 1n the:

.......
colOtbUIObril'IJ.llp l color

.. ..
How to use this chapter 83
 Summary of mouse To click To press
techniques

You can do all your work on 1. Position the pointer on what 1. Position the pointer on a
Lhe computer (except type you want to select or make menu title, a scroll arrow, or
text and numbers) with five active. wherever you want the action
mouse techniques: to happen.
2. Press and quickly release the
o click, to select or make mouse button. 2. Without moving the mouse,
active press and hold down the
mouse button.
o press, to cause a continuous
action As long as you hold down the
mouse button, the effects of
o drag, to select or move
pressing continue. Pressing
o double-click, to open icons on scroll arrows results in
quickly continuous scrolling.
Pressing on a menu title pulls
o Shift-click, Lo include a
down the menu and keeps it
selection in a group (or
down until you release the
deselect it)
mouse button .
.c"\

I"~ ~"\

~------ \
\ --------- )
--------
84 Chapter 3: Your Macintosh II Step by Step
-
 - To drag To double-click To Shift-click

1. Position the pointer on 1. Position the pointer on 1. Select something by clicking

something. something. or dragging.
2. Press and hold down the 2. Press and release the mouse 2. Hold down the Shift key while
mouse button, and move the button twice in quick you continue to select (or
mouse. succession. deselect) by clicking.
3. Release the mouse button.
You can usually cancel
dragging by moving the
pointer back to where it
started. Cancel dragging in a
menu by moving the pointer
off the menu . Cancel moving
an icon or window b y moving
the pointer into the me nu

- bar.

\
\
\

....... _.. -~:

\

\
\ ~~-
\

\ \ --- --'---- -
~
-- ... - -- - ~-- -
---
\

Summary of mouse techniques 85

 n
Handling windows To activate a window To move a window

A window frames its contents. 1. Find an inactive window (one 1. Position the pointer a nywhere
The contents can be a w ithout horizontal lines in its in the title bar of the window
directory of a disk or folder, a title bar). excep t the close box or zoom
des k accessory, or a box (if any).
2. Click anywhere in the window.
document you create w ith an
2. Drag the window to a new
application. Activating a window brings it
location.
to the front, w he re it can
A window always has a title bar
overlap or completely cover The w indow becomes the
and may have
other windows. To see active window if it's not
o scroll bars covered windows, move the already.
active window or make it
oa close box To cancel the move, move
smalle r.
the pointer into the me nu
o a size b ox
bar. You can't drag a window
oa zoom box comple tely off the desktop.
Each application's manual To move a window without
tells you more about windows
in that application.
"I activating it, hold down the
Apple key while you drag.

• I 1l e Edit ll1ew \pee rdl

T .. ,a tT .. t

[_···---··--·-····-·· ·-· ·--·-·---·--·----·-·----·-····-·-·------·--·- 1IIill

T•·a t1

86 Chapte r 3: Your Macintosh II Ste p b y Ste p

 To close a window To zoom a window To change a window's
size

1 . Activate the window by 1. To expand the window, click 1 . Activate the window by
clicking anywhere inside it. the zoom box in Lhe top-right clicking in it.
corner of the Lille bar.
2. Choose Close from the File 2. To use the size box, move the
menu or click the close box 2. To shrink the window back to window if necessary so that
on the left side of the title bar. ilS original (smaller) size, the size box in the bottom-
click the zoom box again. right corner is visible.
Some windows don't have a
close box. When that's the Some windows don't have a 3. Drag the size box or click the
case, you can usually close the zoom box. zoom box.
window by clicking anywhere
Dragging horizontally
inside it. If an application
changes the width, dragging
doesn't have a close box or a
vertically changes the height,

-
Close command, read that
application's manual to find and dragging diagonally
changes both. The new
out how to dose its window.
dimensions take effect only
when you release the mouse
button.

-
Close box - - - - - - - - - - - '
Zoornbox - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 - - - -.....;::;.:.;;:.:.;.;.:;.::;;;.._ _ _ _...:.;;~_,
Size box -----------'f'"'"'--'P-------....,...----------...
lpd~·: ....

........---
I
L=--=--======-·-------------····--·-
-·-·- -~--'
Handling windows 87
 Scrolling To scroll line by line To scroll by the windowful

Scroll bars let you see more of 1. Determine whether you want 1. Note the position of the small
a directory (that is, a list of a to see the area preceding or white box in the gray scroll
disk's contents) or more of a following the part of the bar.
document. screen you're looking at now.
If the scroll box is at the very
2. Click the arrow that points in top or bottom of the scroll
the direction of what you want bar, you can only scroll in
to see. one direction. If there is a
gray area above and below the
You can scroll continuously
box, you can scroll in either
line by line by pressing the
direction.
scroll arrow.
2. Click in the gray area of the
scroll bar.
You can scroll continuously
by the windowful by pressing
in the gray area of the scroll
bar.

Is ~-

88 Chapter 3: Your the Macintosh II Step by Step

 To scroll quickly to any
part of a directory or
document

1 . Determine what part of the For example, if you want to go

directory or document you to about the middle of a
want to see. directory or document, d rag
the scroll box to the middle of
The vertical scroll bar
the scroll bar.
represents the length of the

-
""""'
directory or document.
2. Drag the scroll box to a place
in the scroll bar that
represents that approximate
position.
Some applications show the
page numbers in the scroll
box.

-
-

- I~
. . 01
o
'· hht1111- F'c.}j~..-

i
Tn ti

Scrolling 89
 Selecting icons To select an icon To select more than one
icon

In the Finder, you select by • Click anywhere on it. When they're grouped
clicking or dragging. together:
Clicking an icon's name also
See each application's selects the icon. 1. Position the poinler outside
manual for instructions on one corner of a group of
how to select information in icons.
that application. See "Editing
2. Drag to the opposite corner.
Text" and "Renaming" in this
chapter for more about how You can choose Select All
to select icon names and how from the Edit menu to select
to edit them. all icons in the active window.
If you don't want to include
one of the icons, you can
deselect it; just hold the Shift
key down and click the icon.

~ Stjslem Folder

YI
=
er Jtt· ~flip.
Pl
'=
1~ ~ ara t"(~

90 Chapter 3: Your Macintosh II Step by Step

- When Lhey aren't grouped You can also Shift-click to
together: select more than one ilem in
directories you 've arranged in
1. Select one icon by clicking.
text views (that is, views other
2. Hold down the Shift key while than by icon).
you continue to select icons
You can select more than one
by clicking.
icon only whe n they're in the
Holding the Shift key down same window or they're all on
while you click a selected icon the desktop.
deselects it.

s File Edit U1ew SpeC1al

System Folde1
l 8 1ttms

.. ·-

Selecting Icons 91
 Editing text To insert text To select text

In the Finder, you can e nter 1. Click co select the insertion 1. Drag across the text
and edit point. (diagonally if there's more
than one line) to the e nd of
o the names of disks, You can also use the direction
the text you want to select.
documents, folde rs, and keys to move the insertion
a pplications point. 2. Double-click a word to select
it quickly.
o text in desk accessories such 2. Type to add text at the
as Scrapbook and Note Pad insertion point.
o text in the comment box of When there's no existing text
information windows (which (sometimes in dialog boxes,
you open by choosing Get for example), the insertion
Info from the File menu) point may already be
selected.
See each application's
manual for more o n how to
e nter and edit text in that
application.

. Ill
LJ
• ·· mf" <! .. • Tej ( f ;toon
_j

s I 1IP Edit Ll1ew Spec 1al

Paint ~--

~
"': I

-- _
f lJ. Patr.t

......... ........... ;;i;- - --""

92 Chapter 3: Your Macintosh II Step by Step

n
 To move text To c opy text To rep lace text

1. Select by dragging across the 1 . Select the text by dragging 1 . Select the text by dragging
text. across it. across it.
2. Choose Cut from the Edit 2. Choose Copy from the Edit 2. Type what you want to replace
me nu . menu. the text with, or choose Paste
from the Edit menu to replace
3 . Select the insertion point by 3. Select the insertion point by
the text with what was last cut
d icking where you want the dicking where you want the
_or copied.
text to go. copied text to go.
4. Choose Paste from the Edit 4. Choose Paste from the Edit
me nu . menu.

Sp ec•..dl
"
r-i
r11 e [d1l Ll 1eui

: Note P.id

~ ·~ur1r

- --- -

• --~
Frie Edr.( U1eu1 Specia l
; ..,ote Pad
(g]
, 11+
wor /

·- - -

Editing text 93
 -"

To remove text .....\

~,_

1 . Select the text by dragging

~
across it.
2. Press the Delete key or choose
Cut or Clear from the Edit tlllllll
menu.
If you really want to remove
the text (rather than move it ~

somewhere else), the Delete

key is the fastest way to do it.
Using the Delete key doesn't
.....
affect the contents of the
Clipboard. .--i

,... i

94 Chapter 3: Your Macintosh II Step by Step ,..,

-
Using desk accessories
Desk accessories, always available in the Apple menu, are mini-
applications you can use in the Finder and in most applications.
Desk accessories let you do simple calculations while you're working
on a word p rocessing docume nt, tell the computer w hich printe r to
use, and even keep a scrapbook full of your favorite illustrations or
text you use in a variety of documents.
Some desk accessories-the Alarm Clock, Calcu lator, Chooser,
Control Panel, Find File , Key Caps, and Scrapb ook-are installed
automatically on your application disks when you update them with
the system software on the System Tools disk. (See "Startup Disks"
in Chapter 4.) You can also use the Font/D A Mover to add or
re move desk accessories from your startup disks. (See the
Macintosh System Utilities User's Guide for informatio n on using
the f ont/DA Mover.)
The desk accessories installed on a startup disk are available in the
Apple me nu whenever that disk is the current startup disk. The
Utilities disk includes a desk accessory file with Note Pad and
Puzzle- desk accessories you might want to add to othe r startup
disks. You can also purchase addi tional desk accessories and add

-
them to your startup disks.
This section explains how to use the Chooser, the Control Panel,
Find File, a nd the Scrapbook. Sec "Desk Accessories" in Chapter 4
fo r information about other desk accessories.

Using desk a ccessories 95

 Using the Chooser To connect or disconnect
AppleTalk -
You use the Chooser desk AppleTalk is a communica- The AppleTalk connection
accessory (from the Apple tions network you can use to setting shou ld always match
menu) to connect to o r connect computers and to whether you're connected to
disconnect from an share printers and other AppleTalk o r not. When you
AppleTalk network, to choose devices on the network. physically connect or
between devices connected disconnect AppleTalk, always
1. Click Active if you're
directly to your computer's come here immediately and
physically connected to
Printer or Modem ports, or to click the appropriate box.
AppleTalk.
choose printers, file servers,
3. Type you r name in the User
or other devices on the 2. Click Inactive if you're
Name box so the network can
AppleTalk network. (See physically disconnected from
let other users know when
"AppleTalk Personal AppleTalk.
you're using a shared device.
Network" in Chapter 5 for
more information.)
The Chooser shows icons for
the devices available to you,
based on the resources of the
current startup disk. In order
to ensure that you get the most
out of the Chooser, you'll
want to know about the
Installer-a utility program
that installs the Chooser so it
appea rs on the Apple menu
and updates the most current
resources on your startup
disk. For more information, ( tlOO\ef

see "Using the Installe r" late r

in this chapter.
If you use the Chooser from
within an application to
change printers, choose Page
Setup and confirm the settings
you want before you choose
Print.

96 Chapter 3: Your Macintosh II Step by Step

- To choose a printer
connected directly to your
computer
To choose a device on an
AppleTalk network
To c hoose a device on
another AppleTalk
network

1. Click the icon that represents 1. Click the icon that represents AppleTalk networks can be
the printer you want to use. the type of device you want to linked together to form an
use. inte rconnected series of
When you click the icon, a
AppleTalk zones. If your
box appears that presents If necessary, use the scroll bar
network is linked with other
icons for the Printe r and to find the icon you wa nt.
AppleTalk networks and you
Modem ports.
When you dick an icon, a have access to multiple zones,
2. Click the icon that represents Select box appears and lists use the Chooser to scan for
the port your printer is the names of all the devices devices on those zones.
connected to-either the available on your network.
1. Click the icon that re presents
Printer port or the Modem
2. Click the device name to the type of device you want to
port.
select the device you want. use.
The ports on the back of your
3. Type your name in the User If necessary, use the scroll bar
computer are marked with
Name box so the network can to find the icon you want.
icons to let you know which
one is for the printer and let other users know when
When you click an icon, two
you're using a shared device.
which one is for the modem. new boxes appear. The Zones
For more information, see box lists all zones you have
"AppleTalk Pe rsonal access to, and the zone that
Network" in Chapter 5. first appears highlighte d is the
one your computer is on. The
Select box lists the names of
all devices (of the type you
just chose) that are connected
to the highlighted zone.
2 . Scan each zone by clicking on
~o Choo\er
its name until you find the
Select o LeserWnter
device you want to use.
~M riew 'iorl
lmag,.'a'rit,., ChlcOQ() 3. Click the device name to
New Orleens
select the one you want.
4. Type your name in the User
Name box so the network can
let other users on the network
tlorl ellng User rieme know when you're using a
Production IRosmussen shared device.
Sales
30

Using the Chooser 97

 Using the Control To set Desktop Pattern To set Rate of Insertion
Panel Point Blinking

You use the Control Panel You can customize your When you click the pointer to
from the Apple menu to desktop by selecting from a insert text in a document, the
personalize your computer to variety of desktop patterns or insertion point blinks so it's
your way of doing things. In designing you r own. easie r to see on the screen.
the Control Panel, you select You can adjust the rate of its
1. Click the General icon if it
icons that represent parts of blinking.
isn't already highlighted.
your computer system.
1 . Click the General icon if it
Selecting an icon brings up a The Control Panel shows a
isn't already highlighted.
box of features for you to miniature desktop where you
choose among. can look at a pattern and a Use the scroll bar if necessary
magnified view of the pattern. to bring the General icon into
Make sure you update each of
view.
your startup disks to have the 2. Change the pattern as you
current Control Panel. wish. 2. Click any button from Slow to
Fast to set the rate at which the
See "Control Panel" in o Click (or drag through) dots
vertical bar marking the
Chapter 4 for more to change them from black to
information. insertion point blinks.
white or vice versa.
oClick the white "menu bar"
in the miniature desktop to
see a sample pattern. (Click
on the right to see the next
pattern; click on the left to see
the preceding pattern.)
o Set the pattern by clicking
the miniature desktop below
the white bar.
oWith a color monitor,
change the color of the dots
in the pattern by selecting the
dots and clicking one of the
eight colors in the color bar.
To choose different colors,
double-click on a color in the
color bar to bring up a color
wheel.

98 Chapter 3: Your Macintosh II Step by Step

 To set Menu Blinking To set the Time To se t the Date
"""'
.......
1 . Click the General icon if it 1. Click the General icon if it 1. Click the General icon if it
isn't already highlighted. isn't already selected. isn't already selected.
Use the scroll bar if necessary 2. To select a time format, click 2. Click the digits you want to
to bring the General icon into either 12 hr. or 24 hr. change; then click the up or
view. down arrow to scroll the
3. Click the digits you want to
numbers higher or lower.
2. Click any button from 1 to 3 to change; then click the up or
f"""; determine the number of down arrow to scroll the
times menu items blink. numbers higher or lower.
If you don't want me nu items
""""' to blink, dick Off.

Con t rol Pane l =

Ratt of lnurt ion
Point Blinking

Duk lop P alltrn

s1o... Fast

DI
M•nu Blinkln9 Tim• (9

~ t-@_:_:~_2_:_.0_A_~_4 ~
0 O ®O
4 9

~
_h• -1 1
=i1flli

Off 1 2 3
D•I•
3/3 /87 .~ =U

Using the Control Panel

 To use RAM Cache To set Speaker Volume

Using the RAM cache can 3. Use the arrows to scroll to the 1. Click the General icon if it
greatly speed up your work, amount of memory you want isn't already highlighted.
allowing an application to to use for the RAM cache.
2. Adjust for the volume you
store some of the information
Because the RAM cache takes want by dragging the knob up
it needs in a part of memory
some space in memory, you or down.
you reserve just for this. When
may not want to use it with
the application needs the Setting the lowest volume
applications that require large
information again, it doesn't makes the computer alert you
amounts of memory. A rule of
have to go to the disk but can subtly by blinking the menu
thumb is to use no more than
get it much more quickly from bar rathe r than by making an
one fourth of the computer's
the RAM cache in memory. Alert Sound.
available me mory (no more
1 . Click the General icon if it than 256K if your system For mo re control over sound,
isn't already highlighted. doesn't have a RAM click the Sound icon to set
expansion kit). preferences for the Alert
2. Set RAl'v1 Cache On.
Sound. (Scroll the menu on
the left side of the Control
Panel to see the Sound icon.)
;o Control Pa nel

- f!:!
....
...
.. Rate"' lnserh:m
Ii t- ...
...
... r:J Pomt 81m~ mg

I
(·E-s: t,-.~ Pattt>n1 c
Sb·
I!.• 0
ri.'
~
~ "~t·o.ir 1 r t•r..J Bhrt 1f'I-: Tm,"
'9

'!
9 r .J -19 Af'I

QI
r 1.:.r.itvrs
[QJ .
1• >l~t., Q 24 hr
6 -
s-
4 -
3 -
() O@O (•j t l!'
~ 2
I -
Otr 1
- 3 :;, 3/87 0 -

c
r • u. t
r RAM Ca ch• 2S6K ! I (;) @
On
0
Off
Spuktr
Volumt
30

100 Chapter 3: Your Macintosh II Step by Step

 To set Key Repeat Rate To set Delay Until Repeat

When you press and hold 1 . Click the Keyboard icon.

~ down a character key, the
Use the scroll bar if necessary
Macintosh II begins repeating
to bring the Keyboard icon
... that character. You can set
the rate at which a key you
press will repeat.
into view.
2. Click any check box from
Long to Short to set the length
,.... 1. Click the Keyboard icon if it
isn't already selected.
of time the computer waits
before repeating a key you're
If necessary, use the scroll bar pressing. Click Off to turn off
~
to bring the Keyboard icon key repeating.
into view.
Set a longer delay if you 're
2. Click any button from Slow to
,,.., Fast to set the rate.
getting a lot of repeated
characters when you don't
intend them .

.n Control Panel ----

L.r

1 1-~1 1
~ Key Repeat Rate Delay Until Repeat

=
r--- 00®00 0 0®00
C•-:-r.·~·r":, 1 Slow Fast Off Lon9 Short

-- 11!!!!11

-
11--11
f ~ ·~· r11 t •:, r· :

!Ell
r k~u:~-:-
vi:
~. 11

Using the Control Panel 101

 ~
' I
I

To set Monitor Status for a

single monitor

If you have a single monitor Clicking Monochrome gives If you choose to limit the
connected to your computer, you a true gray scale-evenly number of grays to two, you
you specify whether you want spaced shades of gray. will not be seeing a true gray
to see colors or grays and how Clicking Color gives you the scale. Black and white will be
many of either your monitor gray equivalents of colors.
(1he grays you see depend on
the only colors on your
screen. (This will look the
....
. I
will display.
the luminance of the colors same as the screen on earlier
1 . Click the Monitor icon if it
represented. It's like watching versions of the Macintosh.)
isn't already highlighted.
a color show on a black-and-
4. If your monitor is color, click
The monitor controls will white television set.)
the Convergence Test button
appear.
3. Scroll to the number of colors to check the convergence
2. Click Color or Monochrome. or shades of gray you want. pattern.
With a color monitor, even If you clicked Monochrome in This will help you verify that
though you may prefer color step 2, the heading will say the red, green, and blue light
most of the time, you might No. of Grays. If you clicked beams are aimed correctly for
want monochrome when Color, it will say No. of the best color picture. (If you
you're doing a lot of word Colors. don't know how to adjust
processing. color convergence, see the
With the standard video card,
monitor manual.)
Monochrome monitors won't you can get a maximum of 16
show color, of course, but you colors or grays. With the With a monochrome
can click either Monochrome video card expansion kit monitor, convergence
or Color to vary the quality of installed, you can get a pattern is not an issue, but it's
the grays on your screen. maximum of 256. (More OK to click the Test button if
colors or grays means you're curious.
drawing to the screen will be a
Once you've completed these
bit slower.)
selections, your monitor is
set. And you can always come
back and change your choices
when your needs change.

102 Chapter 3: Your Macintosh II Step by Step

 To set Monitor Status for
multiple monitors

With multiple monitors (all 2. Click Color or Monochrome With the standard video card,
connected to your Macintosh for the selected monitor. you can get a maximum of 16
II), you make the same colors or grays. If you ha~e
With a color monitor, even
choices as you would with a installed the video card
though you may prefer color
single monitor-and you expansion kit, you can get a
most of the time, you might
repeat some parts of the maximum of 256. (More
want monochrome when
process for each of your colors or grays means
you 're doing a lot of word
~ monitors. You also position drawing to the screen will be a
processing.
your monitors to suit your bit slower.)
needs, select a Main Monitor, Monochrome monitors won't
If you choose to limit the
and fine tune the way your show color, of course, but you
number of grays to two, you
monitors relate to each other. can click either Monochrome
will not be seeing a gray scale.
(For more information, see or Color to vary the quality of
Black and white will be the
~ "Monitors and the Control the grays on your screen.
only colors on your screen.
Panel" in Chapter 4.)
Clicking Monochrome gives Obis will look the same as the
1 . Click the Monitors icon if it you a true gray scale-evenly screen on earlier versions of
-- isn't already highlighted.
The monitor controls will
spaced shades of gray.
Clicking Color gives you the
gray equivalents of colors.
the Macintosh.)
4. If the selected monitor is
appear. color, click the Convergence
~ (The grays you see depend on
Test button to check the
The box at the bottom of the the luminance of the colors
convergence pattern.
panel shows an icon for each represented. It's like watching
~ of the monitors connected to a color show on a black-and- This will help you verify that
your main unit. The first time white television set.) the red, green, and blue light
you bring up the panel, beams are aimed correctly for
3. Scroll to the number of colors
monitor 1 will be highlighted the best color picture. Of you
or shades of gray you want.
to show that it is the "selected don't know how to adjust
monitor." (You will select If you clicked Color in step 2, color convergence, see the
each monitor in tum when the heading will say No. of monitor manual.)
you are ready to make choices Colors. If you clicked
about that monitor's status. Monochrome, it will say No.
See step 5.) of Grays.

Using the Control Panel 103

 If the selected monitor is Put simply, in order to 8. If you have changed the
monochrome, convergence coordinate activities among positions of any monitor
pattern is not an issue, but it's multiple monitors, your icons or identified a new main
OK to click the Convergence computer wants to know where monitor, close the Control
Test button if you're curious. they are. You create a replica Panel and choose Restart
of your setup by positioning from the Special menu.
5. In the box at the bottom of the
monitor icons to correspond
panel, click an icon to select You must restart the compuler
to the physical arrangement
the next monitor for which for these changes to take
of monitors in your work area.
you want to define effect.
characteristics. 7. Identify your main monitor
by dragging the menu bar to
•:• Repeat steps 2 through 5 for
the appropriate icon.
each of your monitors.
The Main Monitor is the one
6. Identify the positions of your
on which you'll find the
monitors.
standard menu bar. In effect,
In the lower part of the panel, it's your base of operations.
drag each icon to the correct You can designate any one of
position according to the your monitors as the Main
actual location of the Monitor.
corresponding monitor in
your work area. That is, if When you first use this panel,
monitor 1 will automatically
monitor 2 sits on a shelf
be selected as the main
above monitor 1, drag its
monitor. You can change that
icon to sit on top of the icon
setting or leave it as is.
for monitor 1, and so on.
Continue placing the icons
until you've reproduced your
entire monitor setup.

~
I

104 Chapter 3: Your Macintosh II Step by Step

I l
 To set Mouse Tracking To set Your Double-Click
Speed

1. Click the Mouse icon. 1. Click the Mouse icon.

Use the scroll bar if necessary Use the scroll bar if necessary
to bring the Mouse icon into to bring the Mouse icon into
view. view.
2. Change the Mouse Tracking 2. Change the double-click
speed to meet your style. speed to match your own
speed.
o Click a button from Slow to
Fast to make the pointer oClick the leftmost button for
movement speed variable. the computer to interpret
fairly slow successive clicks as
If you set the mouse speed
a double-click.
faster, you won't have to
move the mouse as far as you oClick the rightmost button if
otheiwise would when you you've got a fast mouse-
want to jump to another part bu tton finger.
of the screen.
o Click the middle button if
OR you 're somewhere in-
between.
oClick the Very Slow (Tablet)
button to keep the pointer
speed constant.

o_ Control Panel

~ Mouse Tracking
11~11 ..___.
,;40
=
1~·.:.r.,;.r-;:, 1
(1) ~= :~
(Tablet) (Mouse)
0 0 0 @0
I... ~=-:I Very Slow Slow Fast

~
""'Jl"'.'<""j

1 + + +
+ 0 •@ •o

~
r
[1·
11:1r11rd~;
I[
mi l>ouble-Click Speed

""\

IE
IJ
In'
! (I

Using the Control Panel l 05

 To set the sound controls To set Startup Device

, ~It
, I

1 . Click the Sound icon. There are several choices 1. Click the Startup Device icon.
available. The speaker plays
2. Set the volume you want by
dragging the knob up or
back each sound as you click
Use the scroll bar if necessary
to bring the Startup Device
""': "
\

it, and you can try them all to

down. icon into view.
find the one you prefer to
At the lowest level, the hear when the computer wants The icons that appear
computer blinks the menu bar to get your attention. represent all the devices that
to alert you (with no sound). might contain the informa-

.,
tion the computer needs to
This control is the same one
get started.
that appears when you click
the General icon. Setting the 2. Click the device you want your
volume in either place moves computer to start from.
the knob in both places.
Until you change it, this will
3. In the Alert Sound Setting be the disk drive your
box, click the sound that suits computer will start from each
you best. time you turn your computer
on (assuming there's no
startup disk in one of the
3.5-inch disk drives). ,.,
--~~~ rontrnl Panel ,
Alert Sound Setting

~,
5-
4
3
Guitar G
Boing
Monkey
Bo~
to. 2-
1-
0 -

Speaker
Volume

"'"'\

106 Chapter 3: Your Macintosh II Step by Step

 Using Find File To use Find File in a search

- You use the Find File desk

accessory to find any folder
When you see the name of the
file you want and select it,
1 . Choose Find File from the
Apple menu.
o r file (a document, Find File also tells you when a
The Find File box comes u p,
application, resource, o r file was created, when you last
and a new menu title, Find
system file) on the disk. changed it, how big it is, and
File, appears on the menu
how much space it takes up on
The hierarchical file system bar.
the disk. In addition, Find File
makes it easy to store dozens
will show you where in the 2. Type the name (or part o f the
of documents away in
hierarchical file system it name) of the file you're
different folders-especially
found the file you wanted. l ooking for.
on a hard disk. You can even
Find File w ill even move the
store several documents or If you type apple, Find File
file to the desktop for you .
folders with the same name in will look for any folder or file
different places, or in folders You can use Find File either that has the word apple in any
within folders within folders. from the Finder or from part of its title-for example,
(See "Managing Documents, within an application. Letter to Apple or applesauce.
Folders, and Applications"
~
Find File will make an Alert
later in this chapter.) 13ut with
Sound when it's finished
all that flexibility you may
searching.
sometimes lose track of where
you've stored a particular
document. Find File locates
the file or folder you ask for.
~ fll r rt P

Current disk name Find Fil e

Click here to change drives. - - - - - - 1-t.=>1 Sy ste m Too ls

""""
.----~..,--~~~~~~~~~~~~-

Se arc h for: app l ~

Type title to look for here.

- Click here to start search.

Matching titles appear here.
10

""""'

Using Find File 107

 If you type several words (or 3. To focus the search, choose o To open a selected folder,
partial words) separated by Search Here from the Find click Open folde r (or double
spaces, Find File will look for File menu. click on the folde r's name.)
titles that have all of the words
You will sec a standard file o To close an opened folder
in them. (Technicall y
dialog box. With large- and drop back one level in the
speaking, it does an AND
capacily hard disks , it's directory, click on the disk
search.) For example, apple
possible to create multiple named ab ove the Eject
letter finds l etter Lo Apple, but
files with the same (or similar) button.
not applesauce or Letter Lo
names. This d ialog box lets
mom, because only Letter Lo o To select the curre nt folde r
you select drives, eject disks,
Apple contains both apple and or disk for searching, click
and limit the search to suit
letter. OK.
you r needs.
o To search for a file on a disk o To cancel limited
o To change disks, click Eject.
in another drive, click on the searching, click Cancel.
current disk's icon in the top- o To change d rives, click
left corner of Find File's Drive.
window.

\1•<11 r h:
r:E:J \lj\lr•rnTii'Okl
CJ S stem Folder. \lJ\lern Tool\
(:; Updotr. I rrlrlr.r
Utrlrlrl' \ I ohll•r yect
,.--
D1111e
Click here to close
on opened folder. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - "
Open roldrr

OK
( anc rl
-

108 Chapter 3: Your Macintosh II Step by Step

- 4. Click the Running Man icon To stop the search, click the
(or press Return). Stop button. Once you click
Stop, the search is canceled
Find File starts a systematic
(and clicking the running man
search of all the folders and
again w ill not resume the
files on the current disk,
search).
looking fo r titles that match
what you've typed into the When Find File has finished
Search for box. searching, it makes an Alert
Sound.
Each time it finds a match,
Find File displays the name of
that file or folde r.

• fill' Ldil Ll1ew S(lPClill f 111cl File

1
~§~0~~~~~ii~~~~£r~in~dBF~il~eji~~~~~~ijjiijiij~j!im--i
Click here to change disks. System Tools
ppl ~

These names all matched. - - - -.

Stoplcon - - - - -- - ----...j.-- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - J
Running Man icon ----------+--------------------

Using Find File l 09

5. Select the file or folder you're 6. Choose Move to Desktop
interested in. from the Find File menu.
In the bux at the bottom right, The file selected (in step 5)
Find File shows you the path will be moved automatically
to that file or folde r. from where it was stored to the
desktop where you can easily
In the box at the bottom left,
work with iL
you'll find valuable
information about the file o r If the file stays on the desktop
folder you've selected. while you work on it, you can
use the Put Away command to
You don't have to wait fo r
put it back exactly where it
Find File to stop searching lo
came from. or course, you
get information; just click Lhe
can put it into any window or
title you're interested in al any
folde r you choose.
time.

___,
-0 Find File ~
C5l System Tools
Searc h for: lapple
II li Jm
I [!]
~

D
1.0
..
Appl•Talk lmag•Writer It-, I},£

Select a lille here.

Here's information about it.
L I
Created :
Modlfied
I

Tue, Feb 10, 1987; 10 :24 AM

Tue, Feb 10, 1987 , 10 ·24 AM
GI Utilities Folder G Here's where it is.

1
C5) Syst em Tools
Size- : 22155 b~tes ;
22K on disk
lo

110 C hapter 3: Your Macintosh II Step by St ep

Using the Scrapbook To add an image to the
Scrapbook

You can paste your favorite 1. With a document or desk 4. Choose Paste from the Edit
pictures and text into the accessory open, select the menu.
Scrapbook and retrieve them text or pictures you want to
The image is pasted in front of
whenever you want to use add to the Scrapbook.
the current image in the
them again. You can cut,
See each application's Scrapbook. 'The text on the
copy, and paste images
manual for how lo select using bottom left tells you the
among the Scrapbook, your
that application. position this image has in the
documents, and any desk
Scrapbook. The text on the
accessory that uses text. (For 2. Choose Cut or Copy from the
bottom right te lls whether the
example, you might keep your Edit menu.
image is text or a picture. On
letterheads there.)
Choosing Cut removes the certain cases it may indicate
The contents of the original; choosing Copy just which application the image
Scrapbook are stored in the copies it. What you selected is came from.) You can use the
Scrapbook file on the current placed on the Clipboard, scroll bar lo look at the
startup disk. You can move where it remains until you different items in the
these Scrapbook files among next choose Cut or Copy. Scrapbook. (See "Scrolling"
your startup d isks lo customize earlier in this chapter.)
3. Choose Scrapbook from the
the disks with the contents you
Apple menu.
want. (See "Copying or
Moving a Document, Folder,
or Application" later in this
chapter and "The Current
Startup Disk" in Chapter 4.)
Depending on the size and l •ti r head
contents of the image you 3€ H Scrapbook
paste into the Scrapbook, you 3€ C

might not see the entire image

until you paste it somewhere book as a place to keep pi ctures,
else . l !W t~ rt or anything you create w ith Macintosh:
DC Hll
:)[:[ erhead design to paste into your memos
tribution list or ot her frequently used t ext
ary of MacPaint i mages to illustrate

See your ow ner's guide for more in f ormation.

- 1 / 7

Using t he Scrapbook
TE XT ~

111
 To remove an image from To move or copy an
the Scrapbook image from the
Scrapbook to a document

1. Open the Scrapbook and 1. Open the Scrapbook and 4. Open the document you want
make it active. make it active. to add the image to.
2. Scroll to the image you want 2. Scroll to the image you wanr to If the document is already
to remove. (See "Scrolling" move or copy. open, just dick in it to make it
earlier in this chapter.) the active window.
'Ine current image is
As each image appears in the automatically selected. 5. Select the place you want the
Scrapbook window, it is image pasted into.
3. Choose Cut or Copy from the
automatically selected.
Edit menu. 6. Choose Paste from the Edit
3. Choose Cut or Clear from the menu.
The image is placed on the
Edit menu.
Clipboard, where it remains The image is paste d into the
The image is removed from until you next choose Cut or docume nt.
the Scrapbook. Copy.

3€Z Letter to [ontr<Jctor

Scrapbook

E. D. Christopt
Architect

855 Spr uce Dri\

Hillsdale, OH 44
(513) 555- 164

1 /B
PICT I-

112 Chapter 3: Your Macintosh II Step by Step

 Managing documents, folders,
and applications
This section summa rizes how lo use the Finder Lo manage your
documents, folders, and applications-how to copy, move,
d iscard, re name, lock, or just rearrange them. It also includes a
summary of how to manage your documents when you 're using an
application. It shows you how the folders you create in the Finder
appea r whe n you're saving and opening documents within
applications.
!-low you organize your work on the desktop is up to you. You can
nest folde rs one inside the other to create as many hie rarchical
levels as you want, and you can view the contents of each folde r
arranged by icon, name, date the file was last modified, size, or
type. Choosing a different view from the View menu instantly
rearranges the active directory window in the view you choose. For
example, you can quickly see which document is taking the most
space or which is the latest version of a report you're preparing.
The desktop itself is always arranged by icon.
You can do any of your desktop work with the directories in any

- arrangement, and you can have different directories in different

arrangements at the same time. Every item in a directory is
represented by an icon, no matter what arrangeme nt you have the
directory in. In any of the text views, the icon is small and appears
to the le ft of each name. You can click, double-click, drag, or Shift-
click this icon just as you would its counterp art in an icon view of the
directory.

-
Managing documents. folders. and applications 113
 Creating and To create a new To open an existing
opening documents document document

You create a new document 1 . Select lhe icon for lhe 1 . Select lhe icon that represents
by opening Lhe applicalion
you want to use.
application you want to use. the document you want to
work on. n
-
If necessary, inse rt the disk
When you're using an lhat contains that If necessary, insert the disk or
application, you can create application, open the disk disks that conlain that
more documents by choosing icon and any folde rs you docume nt and the
New from lhe File menu. Sec need, and scroll until you see applicaLion you used lo create
"Managing Documents the application icon. it, open the disk icon and any
Within an Application" taler folders you need, and scroll
2. Choose Open from lhe File
in Lhis chapter. until you sec lhc document
menu.
icon.
You open an existing
The appropriate applicalio n
document from Lhe finde r by 2. Choose Open from the File
starts. Usually a new, unlilled
opening lhe icon that menu.
document appears; you'll
represents the document you
name it the first time you save You can also double-click the
want to work on. The
it. icon to open iL
application you'll use wilh
that document starts
automatically.
You can also double-click the
icon Lo open the application.
n
You can also open an existing
document while worki ng in an
applicalion. See "Managing
Documents Within an \peli.tl
- "--...,.---:IC-N-.
Application" later in this
chapter. • Print
mDB••E::I:·~ 1'<1io1

Close

Ge t In fo ...' n
Dupl icate
.. . ~ U tlJUll

Ge t In fo :!C l
Dup lica t e :!C D
" ··• ii1uoq

114 Chapter 3: Your Macintosh II Step by Step

 Using folders To create a new folder To place a folder and its
contents inside another
folder

Folders let you create a • Choose New Folder from the • Drag the folder to the folder
hierarchy of system files, File menu. icon or window you want it in.
applications, and documents
A folder name d Empty Folder The folder you drag (the
so you can arrange your work
appears in the active window. source folder) and its
in whatever way you want and
You can rename it by typing. contents are placed inside the
get at what you need qu ickly.
folder you drag to (the
If you work with just a few destination folder). If the
applications and a moderate destination folder is on a
number of documents, you different disk, the source
may prefer not to nest many folde r is copied rather than
levels of folders within moved.
folders. It's easie r to see If the destination folder
everything that's on a disk
already contains a folder with
without having lots of folders the same name , you'll be
w rummage through. But if asked whether you want to
you have many documents, replace the existing folder.
and especially if you have a Clicking OK replaces the
hard disk, folders help you get
existing folder and its
rid of clutter you're not
contents with the source
interested in at the mome nt,
folder and its contents,
and they greatly speed up whether or not the folders'
access to what you do want.
contents include duplicate
No matter how deeply you names.

- nest folders, you can always

find a document by using the
Find File desk accessory. See
"Using Find File" earlier in
this chapter.
For more information on the
hierarchical file system, sec
"The Hierarchical File
Syste m" in Chapter 4.

. ,, , • ,':.", F

- Using folders 115

 To move a document, To use folders within an
folder, or application from application
one folder to another

• Drag the iLem you want lo See "Managing Documents

move from the folder it's in lo Within an Application" late r
the folder icon or window you in this chapler.
want lo move it to.
If the destination folde r is on
a diffe rent disk, the item is
copied, rather Lhan moved,
lo the new folder. If the
destination folder already
contains an ite m wil.h the
same name, an alert box will
appear, asking you to rename
the item you're moving.

116 Chapter 3: Your Macintosh II Step by Step

Renaming To rename an icon

You can re name a document, 1 . Select the icon that represenls 2. Type the new name.
folder, application, o r disk what you want to rename.
whenever its icon is visible in The selected text (the old
the Finder. (You may need to You need to click an icon o r name) is replaced by the new
inserl the dis k that contains its name to re name it, even if text you type.
w hat you want to rename, the icon is already selected.
(This prevents your re naming Use names that will help you
open the disk icon and any identify the contents (the
folders you need to, and something when you don't
intend to .) There are some more specific, the better).
scroll until you see the icon.) Document and folder names
exceptions: when you create a
If you rename a disk, write the new folde r by choosing New can be up to 31 characters
name on the dis k label. That Folder from the File menu o r (though a name that long is a
way, when the computer asks w hen you duplicate a n item little unwield y), and disk
you to insert a specific disk, on the same disk o r copy il to names can be up to 27
you'll know which one it a d ifferent disk, typing characters. You can use any
needs. renames whatever's selecled, character on the keyboard,
without your having to click except a colon(:). You can
You can usually use the Save use uppercase o r lowercase
As command within an on it.
letters and put spaces between
application to save a words.
document after assigning it a
differe nt name. See 3. If necessary, use the Edit
"Managing Docume nts menu to edit the text
Within an Applicalio n" lale r
in this chapter. s file £ct1t Ll1euo S

P101ect
~ 771 trod

,., I p,
~-I

If
iiMW1M4.f§!tMI B
George ·s Edit•d 0 . GI

=-i
' r

Renaming 11 7
 Copying or moving a To copy to the same disk
document, folder, or
application

You can use the Finder to 1 . Select the icon that represents A new icon appears. The
copy a document, folde r, or the document, folder, or duplicate icon has the same
application to the same disk application you want to copy. name as the original, pre-
whe neve r you can see its icon. ceded by the words Copy of
If necessary, insert the disk or
You might do this to make a
disks that contain what you You can drag the duplicate
backup copy. (See also
want to copy, open the disk copy to any folde r, disk icon,
"Copying an Entire Disk"
icon and any folders you need or window.
later in this chapte r.) Or you
to, and scroll until you see the
might want to make a copy of 3. Rename the duplicate.
icon.
a docume nt to work on
You can rename any
without alte ring the original. See "Selecting Icons" earlier
duplicate copy of a document
For example, you might do in this chapter for how to
or folde r by typing
this to create forms, select more than one icon to
immediately after you create
letterheads, or templates. duplicate.
the copy. Any other time, you
You can copy a docume nt, 2. Choose Duplicate fro m the must click the icon that
folder, or application to File menu. represents what you're
another disk whenever both renaming before you type the
disk icons-the one that holds new name. See "Renaming"
the source and the one that earlie r in this chapter.
represents the
destination-are present. The
source disk must be opened
into a directory window so d1 t ll1c 1 1 p Cldl
you can select the document, New Folder allN
Open allO
folder, o r application you
Prin t
want to copy; the destination Clo se
disk can be either in icon
form or opened into a
di rectory window.
To make a copy of a
document while using an
Page Se tu p
-
Pri nt C11t11log
application, see "Managing
qp r
Documents Within an
Application" late r in this
chapter.

118 Chapter 3: Your Macintosh II Ste p by Step

 To copy or move to a
different disk

1. If necessary, insert the Ii. Drag what you want Lo copy Lo If the destination d isk already
destination disk (so its icon its destination. contains an item with the
will be present). same name, you 'II be asked to
You can drag it to a disk or
2. If necessary, inserL the disk folde r directory window, o r Lo confirm that you want to
that contains what you want to an icon (even a hollow icon) replace the current contents
copy. that represents the disk or with what you're copying.

If you're using a one-drive folder you want it to be in. The copy appears in the
system, eject Lhe destination In an open directory w indow, window you dragged to. (If
disk before you insert Lhe you can place the icon you dragged to a disk or folder
source disk. wherever you wanL If you drag icon, the copy will appea r in
to an icon, the Finder p laces the directory window when
3. Open the disk icon and any you open the icon.)
folders you need to, and the item in the next available
scroll until you see the icon spot. 5. If you're moving (rather than
that represents what you want If you're using a one-drive copying), drag the original to
to copy. the Trash.
system, the computer will
See "Selecting Icons" earlier presenL a series of dialog \Vhenever you drag from one
in this chapter for how to boxes, asking you to insert disk to another, a copy of
select more than one icon to alternately the source disk and what you move is left behind
copy. the destination d isk. for safekeeping. lf you want to
reclaim the space on the
original disk, you can drag the
remaining icon to the Trash
11111 te and choose Empty Trash
from Lhe Special menu.
--l
••
r.: i
~.-.::J
jdli.iG$4.IQ4$m.&ad

,,,,
a " ,.r

•'
16ltfi§4.J,\,\ij

- Copying or moving a d ocument. folder. o r application 119

 Removing or To remove a document, To recove r a document,
recovering an item folder, or application folder, or application

You can throw away a 1. Open the window that You can recover an item as
document, folder, or contains what you want to long as you can see its icon in
application whenever you can remove, and scroll until you the Trash window.
see its icon. The Trash can be see the icon or icons.
1 . Open the Trash window and
visible as an icon or opened scroll until you can see the
2. Drag the icon or icons that
into a directory window. icon that represents what you
represent what you want to
\"'<'hen you put an item in the remove to the Trash icon or want to recover.
Trash, the Trash icon window.
2. Drag the icon out of the Trash
"bulges" to let you know
Discard the contents of an window onto the desktop or
there's something in it.
entire disk by choosing Select into another window.
What you put in the Trash is All from the Edit menu and
If you can't remember where
not immediately gone then dragging any item to the
items in the Trash came from,
forever. If you open the Trash
and can see the icon for a
document, folder, o r
trash; the rest will follow.
To reclaim the space
you can select what you want
to recover and choose Put
r
application in the Trash immediately, choose Empty Away from the File menu.
Trash from the Special menu. This puts the item back where
window, you can recover it.
(But be aware that you won't it came from originally.
Things won't stay in the Trash be able to recover anything
indefinitely, but you can once you've emptied the
usually recover what you've Trash.)
thrown away unless one of --~

these events occurs:

oYou choose Empty Trash
from the Special menu.
DThe Finder needs the space.
o You start an application.
o You eject the disk the items
came from by dragging it to
the Trash.
Aa J\
\

120 Chapter 3: Your Macintosh II Step by Step

 Locking a document To lock a document or To unlock a document or
or application application application

Locking a document or 1 . Select the icon for the 1. Select the icon for the
application prevents it from docume nt or application you document o r application you
being renamed, thrown away, want to lock. want to unlock.
or changed. You can,
2. Choose Get Info from the File 2. Choose Get Info from the File
however, open and print
menu. menu.
locked documents.
The information window The information window
See "Disks" in Chapter 4 to
appears, filled with appears, filled with
learn how to lock disks
information about the ite m. information about the ite m.
physically.

- 3. Click Locked.
The Locked box is checked.
Directories in text views
3. Click the checked Locked box.

indicate which of your

documents and applications
are locked by displaying a
small padlock (to the right of
the document's name).

F!IP I d1· [lj['lJI \pee 1<11

m In fo

[Q Ted's Propoul
Locked i

Kind : M1cPalnt document

Siz:f' : 2048 b~ tes, 2K on disk

Yh•r• : Paint, ex tern.11 ddv e

Crutod : Thu,Feb 12, 1987 2 :18PM

J Modified : Thu, Feb 12, 1987 2 :18PM

-
- Locking a document or application 121
 Printing To choose a printer To print a document from
within the Finder

In the Finde r, you can print a 1 . Choose the Chooser desk 1 . Select the icon that represents
docume nt, a group of accessory from the Apple the docume nt you want to
documents (if they were menu . print.
cre ated by the same
2. Make sure the printer named If necessary, insert the disk or
application), the contents of
and selected in the Chooser disks that contain the
the e nl.ire screen, or a disk or
list box is the one you want to docume nt and the
folde r directory. (With an
print to. application you used to create
ImageWriter® II, you can also
it, open the disk icon and any
print the conte nts of the If the printer named is not
folders you need to, and
acl.ive window .) You can print correct, select the one you
scroll uni.ii you sec the
a document wheneve r you can want. See "Using the
document icon.
see its icon and a disk that Chooser" earlier in this
contains its application is
currently inserted. When you
print from the Finder, the
document's application is
opened automatically.
chapter. 2. Choose Print from the File
menu.
One or more dialog boxes
might appea r, with options
-
for printing your document.
To print a document while
When you are printing
using an application, see
docume nts from the Pinder,
"Managing Documents
Page Setup (from the file
Within an Application" later
in this chapter. menu) does not apply.

If you're using an ImageWriter

II, make sure that the printer is
I <J\Pr 11111 le1 <\dll 11 tlllC I\( O>
n
ready, the select light is on,
Pdqes: • All lrom: To:
and the pape r is at the top of a
fo rm. r 011rr p,1111•: e 1';11 f 11 \I l'OIJI' I •t'l PdflP
°"1olnudl f eecl
If you're using a printer other
than the ImageWriter II, if you
have more than one printer,
or if your printer is attached
somewhere other than the
Printer port, use the Chooser
desk accessory to tell the
compute r which printer to
use. See "Using the Chooser"
earlier in this chapter.

122 Chapter 3: Your Macintosh II Step by Step

 To print a group of To print the current To print the current
documents from the contents of the entire contents of the active

-
Finder screen window

1 . Selecc the documenc icons. 1. Make sure you are connected 1. Make sure you are connected
to an ImageWritcr IT. to an ImageWriter IL
See "Selecting Icons" earlier

-
in this chapcer co see how to You can't use this met.hod You can'c use this method
selecc mo re than one with a LaserWriter®. with a LascrWritcr.
document to print.
2. With Caps Lock down, hold 2. Hold down the Apple a nd
If necessary, insert the disk or down the Apple and Shift keys Shift keys while you press 4.
disks that contain those while you press 4.
If you're also pressing the
documents and the
If you're also pressing the mouse butcon, the action will
application you used to create
mouse button, the action will stare whe n you release the
them, ope n the d isk icons a nd
start whe n you release the button.
any folders you need to, and
button.
scroll until you sec the
documenc icons.
2. Choose Print from the file
menu.
The selected documents will
be printed.

or I l'\JIOlllll'IH l'

Cl ose

Ge t I n f o
Dupli ca t e
3€ 1
3€0
I I
!Hlftifflcf-4.!J.Wl6lfti5!14.l#.!jipD
Put ll11J11tl

Page Se tup ...

Pri nt Ca tal og ...
I
ltiitfiftl!fa·J A.tj DJ
Eje ct 3€E

- Printing 123
 To print the first-level
directory of a disk or folder

1 . In the Finder, select the disk

or folder icon whose Anderson et al.
directory you want to print, or Name Size Kind La~l Mgi;ti[i§d
make the directory window Cl Anderson contract 14K MacWrite document Thu, May 21, 1987 7:37 AM
active. Cl Celebration Invitations 9K MacPaint document Wed, May 20, 1987 9:19 PM
Cl Kudos folder Tue, May 19, 1987 5:23 PM
2. Choose Page Setup from the D Permits folder Wed, May 6, 1987 9:14 AM
File menu to set paper size, Cl Presentation Cover Art 13K MacPaint document Thu, Apr 23, 1987 5:16 PM
printing orientation, and Cl Anderson Proposal Final 15K MacWrile document Thu, Apr 23, 1987 2:19 PM
other options. D Status Reports folder Fri, Apr 17, 1987 7:09 PM
Cl Anderson Plan Additions 14K MacDraw document Fri, Apr 17, 1987 7:04 PM
3. Choose Print Catalog from D Anderson Proposal Ill 16K MacWrite document Thu, Feb 26, 1987 6:45 PM
the File menu. D Subcontractors folder Sat, Feb 7, 1987 3:23 PM
Cl Anderson Proposal 17K MacWrite document Mon, Jan 26, 1987 4:53 PM
A dialog box will appear. D Financial Analysis folder Thu, Jan 15, 1987 10:37 AM
Cl Anderson proposal II 17-K MacWrile document Wed, Jan 14, 1987 9:35 PM
4. Select printing options from D Evaluations folder Fri, Jan 9, 1987 10:11 AM
the choices that appear in the D Transmittals folder Wed, Jan 7, 1987 12:28 PM
dialog box, and click OK or D Anderson Site Plan 27K MacDraw document Tue, Dec 2, 1986 9:45 PM
press Return. D Miscellaneous Notes folder Mon, Jul 7, 1986 1:26 PM

The directory is printed in

whatever view you have it
arranged.

.....
I

124 Chapter 3: Your Macintosh II Step by Step

 Using the MiniFinder To install what you want in
the MiniFinder

You may want to install the 1. In the Finder, select what you 2. Choose Use MiniFinder from
documents and applications want to place in the the Special menu.
you use most often in the MiniFinder.
If the command is dimmed,

-
MiniFinder. It's less cluttered
You can select up to 12 mixed the disk may be locked.
than the Finder, but it has few
or matched documents and
of the Finder's features. 3. Click Install.
applications, as long as they
You can install the are in the same directory A MiniFinde r icon is placed
MiniFinder on any disks that window (drag them there if in the System Folder.
contain applications, whether necessary). Any applications
The next time you start your
or not they're startup disks. needed to work on documents
computer using this disk, or
The computer always starts up in the MiniFinder must be on
quit an application on this
with, and applications quit to, the same disk, but don't have
disk, the MiniFinder will

- any MiniFinder on the current

startup disk.
to be in the MiniFinder. If you
move an application to a
different folder after you've
installed the MiniFinder,
appear instead of the usual
desktop.

however, the MiniFinder

won't be able to find it.
See "Selecting Icons" earlier
in this chapter.

s File [d1t lliew 1 • ;l.m

Appllrnt1on\ 01sk

-
In stall the Minifinder using th e
sele cted documents or applications, or
remoue the Minifinder.

~ -.. @mttjf t t[ Remoue )

~~-~
[ cance l J

1Hltfit:j6MI iiUJWWW

I _*_·_·•_
I
- 1n_1m
_.

Using the MinlFinder

~
Tra:h

125
 To use the MiniFinder To change what is To remove the MiniFinder
included in the MiniFinder

1. Open an application or 1. In the MiniFinder, click 1 . In the MiniFinder, click

document in the MiniFinder Finder. Finder.
by selecting it and clicking Use the Drive button flfSt if
Use the Drive button first if
Open or by double-clicking necessary.
necessary.
its icon.
2. In the Finder, select what you 2. Choose Use MiniFinder from
2. When you are finished with
want to place in the the Special menu.
that application or
MiniFinder.
document, you have several 3. Click Remove.
11
choices: See Selecting Icons earlier
11

Dragging the MiniFinder icon

in this chapter.
o Return to the Finder by to the Trash also removes the
clicking Finder or pressing You can select up to 12 mixed MiniFinder.
Enter. (Click Drive to change or matched documents and
drives, if necessary.) applications.
o Open other applications on The documents and
the same or different disks by applications you select must
clicking Open Other. be in the same directory
I '.
window. Drag them there if
A dialog box appears. It's the
necessary. Any applications
same dialog box you see when
you need to work on
you choose Open within an
documents in the MiniFinder
application, but in the
must be on the same disk, but
MiniFinder you see and open
they don't need to be in the
applications rather than
MiniFinder. If you move an
documents. See "Managing
application to a different
Documents Within an
11 folder after you've installed
Application later in this
the MiniFinder, the
chapter.
MiniFinder won't be able to
o Eject any inserted disks and find it.
restart the computer by
3. Choose Use MiniFinder from
clicking Restart.
the Special menu.
o To see MiniFinders
4. Click Install.
installed on other disks, use
the Eject and Drive buttons.

_...
I ,

126 Chapter 3: Your Macintosh II Step by Step

 Managing To create a new
documents within an document
application

You can do quice a Joe of 1. If necessary, save any unsaved

document management changes and then choose
without leaving the Close from che File menu to

- application you're using. You

can open documents, close
them, save chem, and princ
close the current document
With some applications, you

-
can have just one document
them. And you can orgiu1ize
open ac a time.
your work using the same
folders you create in the 2. Choose New from the

- Finder.
Usually when you choose
Open or Save As within an
application you can see the
application's File menu.
A new document appears. In
most applications, you name
the document the first time
names of folders you created you save it; in a few
in the Finder. applications, you muse name
the document as soon as you
create it.

-
i.oocl1P~ font f nnt\1zP \tylP

Op e n ...
I IO S<~
S<1t•e
S<11•e fl~ ...

- HPUPrl
l'nnt llrntt
!'rm t I' in<1I
Prin t Ca t a l og
Qu i t

Managing documents within an application 127

 To open a n e xisting
document

1. If necessary, save any unsaved The folders in this dialog box o To see the contents of a
changes and then choose correspond to the folders you folder in the current
Close from the File menu to create in the Finder. You directory, select its name and
close the current document. open them by selecting them click Open, or just double-
and choosing Open, or by click on its name.
With some applications, you
double-clicking them.
can have just o ne document You see the contents (both
open at a time. Within applications, folders folders and docume nts) of the
show only the documents the folder you open. You can
2. Choose Open from the
current application can open, move through the entire
application's File menu.
even if the corresponding hierarchy of folders in this
A dialog box appears, with a folders in the Finder contain same way, opening folders
directory of the current folder other documents or within the currently open
or disk. The directory name applications . folder, until you reach the
(and a folder or disk icon) is document you want to open.
above the alphabetized list of
the directory's contents; the
name of the current disk (and
a disk icon) appears to the
right.

Goodie\ font FontS1ze Style

128 Chapter 3: Your Macintosh II Step by Step

 o To trace your way back o To close the currently 3 . Open the document you want
through the hierarchy of opened folder and drop back to work on by clicking on its
folders, press on the to the preceding level in the name and then clicking Open
directory name and choose directory, click on the disk (or just double-dick on its
the folder you want. icon that appears above the name).
Eject and Drive buttons. (You
A list appears below the To select a document or
can repeat this until you get to
directory name when you folder in the current directory
the top of the hierarchy.)
press on the name or quickly, type the character or

- anywhere in the bar that

contains the name. Each
folder in the hierarchy is in
the list, and the d isk directory
o To see documents and
folders on other disks, use the
Drive and Eject buttons.
characters you want to find
and to select. If you pause
while typing, the next
character you type is

- (which includes anything on

the disk that's on the desktop
Clicking Drive (or pressing
the Tab key) always brings you
to the top level of any disk
considered a new request
rather than a continuation of

-
or not in any folder) is at the the old. The Delay Until
inserted in a second drive.
end of the list. Repeat setting in the Control
Panel determines how long
the pause can be before
subsequent typing begins a
new request.
You can also use the directio n
keys to move up and down the
list of names.
You always enter the
hierarchy of documents and
folders at the place you last
opened a document from or
Ilg) Projects '87 l saved a document to.
D Project Schedule~ ~ lg) Proj ec ts '87
D System Folder
Eject
lllH•(!

-
Managing documents within an application 129
 To save a document To save a document with
a different name, or in a
different folder, or on a
different disk

A document is stored only 1. Choose Save As from the o To see folde rs or

temporarily until you save it application's File menu. documents inside a folder in
on a disk the directory, double-click on
A standard file dialog box
the folder's name. You see
• Choose Save from the appears, with a directory·of
any folders within the folder
application's File menu. the folders contained in the
you opened.
current folder or disk. The
Use the Save rathe r than the
directory name (and a folder You can move through the
Save As command fo r
or disk icon) is above the entire hierarchy this way.
routine, periodic saving of
alphabetized list of the folders Open folders within the
your document. The Save
it contains; the name of the currently open folder, until
command saves a document
current disk (and a disk icon) you open the one you want to
with its original name on the
appears to the right. save your document in.
same disk. Choose Save As
when you want to save the The folder names in this When you're saving (rather
current document with a dialog box correspond to the than opening) documents,
different name, o r to copy it folders you create in the you see the entire contents of
to a different folder or disk. Finder. the destination folder. All
items except folders appear
If this is a new document that
dimmed.
hasn't yet been saved, you see
the same standard file dialog
box that appears when you
choose the Save As
command. See "To Save a
Document With a Differe nt
Name, or in a Different
Folder, or on a Different
Disk" in the next column.

Directory name - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ! ol--- -,'....J p-,~oJec t \rhedulrs]

-(ornplett>d l'IOjerl\ k_. - PIOJl'CI\ 87
C urrent disk J fuecutrut> \11rnmil11e'>
-----------------+--.:....:...:.:.::..:;...::..:..:.::..:;,,,,..:.:.:.;.:.:.:.:.~~---.../ ~[Jee C
J

s,we cur 1 en! tlor urn en t l\dl•P J

Un title ~'!.eel

130 Chapter 3: Your Macintosh II Step by Step

 oTo move back through the 2. Type a new name for the Even though more than one

- hierarchy of folders, press on

the directory name and
choose the folder you want.
document if it's a new
document or if you want to
change the current name;
document on a disk can have
the same name as long as
they're in separate folders, it
i-. otherwise it will be saved with may be easier to keep track of
A list appears below the
the same name. documents if you give each
directory name when you

... press on the name or

anywhere in the bar that
contains the name. Each
You can use any character or
symbol on the keyboard
except a colon(:). You can
version a different name.

- folder in the hierarchy is in

the list, and the disk directory
(which includes any folder on
the disk that's on the desktop
use uppercase or lowercase
letters and put spaces between
words. Names can be any
length up to 31 characters, but
~ or not in any other folder) is long names can become
at the end of the list. .unwieldy. It's usually best to
limit them to the space you
.... oTo see folders on other
disks, use the Drive and Eject
have to type them in.
buttons. 3. To save the current document

- oTo close the currently

opened folder and to drop
back to the preceding level in
in the folder named at the top
of the list, click Save.
You always enter the
the directory, click on the disk hierarchy of documents and
name. folders at the place you last
opened a document from or
Clicking Drive or pressing the
~ saved a document to.
Tab key always brings you to
the top level of any disk

-- inserted in a second drive.

Managing documents within an application 131

 To print a document while
within an application

1. Choose Page Setup to set

printing options such as page
orientation and paper size.
If you tend to use the same
setup all the time, you can
usually skip this step.
2. Choose Print from the File
menu.
In most applications, one or
more dialog boxes appears.
You can click the various
options to control the way
your printed document will
look. See uPrinting" earlier in
this chapter for information
about printing from the 1-r
, I
Finder.
If you're using a printer other
than an ImageWriter II, if you
have more than one printer,
or if your printer is attached ~
somewhere other than the I

Printer port, use the Chooser

desk accessory to tell the
computer which printer to
use. Some applications may
not let you use the Chooser;
choose Quit and use the
Chooser in the Finder. See
"Using the Chooser" earlier
in this chapter.

,....
l

i-i ' I

132 Chapter 3: Your Macintosh II Step by Step

- Managing disks
You'll use the Finder to manage entire disks as well as the

-
documents, folders, and applicalions on lhem. Renaming disks
works the same as renaming any icon. See "Renaming" earlier in
this chapter.
Chapter 4, "Macintosh II Reference," contains additional
information about disks.

-
-
-
-

-
- Managing d isks 133
 Initializing a 3.5-inch To initialize both sides of a
disk double-sided disk

Whenever the computer No matter how you initialize 1. Insert a double-sided (SOOK)
encounters a disk it can't them, you always insert disks disk you want to initialize.
interpret, a dialog box in the same way-metal end
2. In the dialog box that
appears and asks whether first, label side up.
you'd like to initialize the disk.
In the Finder, you can
appears, click Two-Sided.
n
With an BOOK disk drive, you Initialization will begin, and
initialize disks that have
have three choices: to you'll have to wait a few
information on them by
initialize the disk with a one- seconds.
choosing Erase Disk from the
sided format, to initialize with
Special menu. This erases 3. Type a name for the disk.
a two-sided format, or to eject
everything on the disk (after
without initializing. To avoid confusion, be sure
giving you the appropriate
to give disks different names.
Initialize single-sided disks to warnings, of course) and gives
be one-sided and double- you the same initialization Initializing a disk this way
sided disks to be two-sided. choices you get with a new installs the hierarchical file
(Single-sided disks hold 400K disk. system, letting you use folders
worth of information; within an application as well
You can initialize disks from
double-sided disks hold as in the Finder. Whenever
within an application without
SOOK.) Disks that are you choose Open or Save As
losing any information in
initialized one-sided don't or save an untitled document
memory, so you can initialize
use the hierarchical file while you're in an
them as you need them.
system and don't show any application, you'll see and be
folder names when you use able to use the same folders
the standard file from within you use in the Finder. See
applications, as you do "Using Folders" and
whenever you choose Open "Managing Documents
or Save As from the Within an Application"
application's File menu. To earlier in this chapter, and
use folders within "The Hierarchical File
applications, you need both a System" in Chapter 4.
double-sided disk initialized
two-sided and a startup disk.
-Th-1~ dl\k 1\ unre-a-da_b_l~e.
D Do you want to rn1t1alr z e 11?

[.-f-J_
ec_t~) One - Sided i!llJ,,itiftil

134 Chapter 3: Your Macintosh II Step by Step

 To initialize a disk so you
can use it in a 400K disk
drive

Once you've initialized a disk 1. Insert the disk you want to

with the two-sided format, initialize.
you can't use it in a 400K disk

- drive; the 400K disk drive

won't be able to read it. You'll
be asked if you want to
initialize the disk, and clicking
2. Click One-Sided.
Initialization will begin, and
you '11 have to wait a few
seconds.
Initialize will erase everything
3. Type a name for the disk.
on the disk.

- Never initialize a single-sided

disk with the two-sided
format. The second side of
To avoid confusion, be sure
to give disks different names.
You can initialize an SOOK disk
the disk has not been tested to be one-sided so you can
for reliability, and you could use it in a 400K disk drive. But
lose all the information on it makes only half the disk
the disk. space available to you and
doesn't install the
hierarchical file system, so
.... you won't be able to use
folders within applications on
the disk.

lnltlallzlng a 3.5-lnch disk 135

 Ejecting a d isk To eject a d isk

To get information from or 1 . Select the icon that represents Choosing Eject usually ejects
save information onto a disk the disk you want to eject a disk (if one's inserted and
not currently inserted, you it's not a hard disk), even if
Or you can make the disk
sometimes first need to eject a none is selected. The Finder
directory window active if
disk. looks for an inserted disk to
you've opened the disk icon.
If the computer needs the eject.
2. Choose Eject from the File
ejected disk later, it will ask for Choosing Restart from the
it. menu.
Special menu also ejects any
Or hold down the Apple key inserted disks and restarts the
and press E. computer. Choosing Shut
Down ejects any inserted disks
and shuts the computer off.

Dragging a disk icon to the

Trash both ejects the disk and
removes the icon from the
desktop. (The computer won't
ask for it again.) If you drag
the current startup disk to the
Trash, the computer ejects
A I
I
I
the disk but doesn't remove its I
I
I
icon. Nothing on the disk is I
I
I
erased, in either case.

,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

,... .......I.
i
l=-

136 Chapter 3: Your Macintosh II Step by Step

 Creating a startup disk To create a startup disk To make a startup disk a
nonstartup disk

- Your computer needs certain

information to be able to start
up properly. Disks that
contain this information (in
1. Insert a startup disk.
If you're using a one-drive
system, eject this disk before
You may want to tum a startup
disk into a nonstartup disk (a
disk just for storing
documents), especially if
going on to the next step, by
system files such as System your're using a hard disk as
choosing Eject from the File
and Finder in the System your main startup disk.
menu.
Folder) are called startup
1 . Start the system using any disk
disks. Because this 2. Insert a new disk (or any disk
other than the one you want to
information can take a fair with enough space for the
be a nonstartup disk.
amount of room on a disk, System Folder you want to
you probably won't want to add). 2. Insert the disk you want to
have all your disks be startup change to a nonstartup disk.
If the disk isn't initialized for a
disks-especially if you're
Macintosh computer, you'll 3. Drag the System Folder to the
using more than one disk
be asked if you want to Trash.
drive. But unless you're using
initialize it. See "Initializing a

-
a hard disk, you need to use a
3.5-Inch Disk" earlier in this
startup disk each time you
chapter.
start your computer.
3. Drag the System Folder to the
In the Finder, the curre nt
new disk icon.
startup disk's icon appears in

-
the top-right corner of the Startup disks can also contain
desktop. applications and docume nts,
depending on how much
See "Startup Disks" in
space you have on the disk.
Chapter 4.
•:• Hard dtsk users: Use your
hard disk as your startup disk.
See Appendix A, "Working
With Hard Disks." s f1IP [clll llll'lll Sill'! ldl

~----------------------------- __________ r:::l

ptMMiiSd t • ~ r , c.=:_1alm=1
~ ammm
--~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ .....

Creating a startup disk 137

 Copying an entire To copy a d isk
disk

You can copy an entire disk 1 . Insert both the source disk 2. Drag the source disk icon to
whenever you can see both its and the destination disk. the destination disk icon.
icon (the source disk icon)
If necessary, first eject any You'll be asked to confirm
and the icon of the disk you
othe r disk by selecting its icon that you want to replace the
want to copy to (the
and choosing Eject from the existing contents of the
destination disk icon).
File menu . If you're using a destination disk with the
Give each disk a unique, one-drive system, insert and contents of the source disk.
meaningful name (either eject the destination disk, and
The computer will tell you if
when you're asked to name a then insert the source disk.
there's not enough room on
new disk or after you finish the
If the destination disk is a new the destination disk-if you're
copying process). If each disk
disk, you '11 be asked if you trying to copy a full 800K disk
has a unique name, it will be
want to initialize it. See to a 400K disk, for example.
easier to keep track of your
"Initializing a 3.5-Inch Disk"
documents, and you'll know If you 're dragging to a hard
earlier in this chapter.
which disk to insert when the disk, items with the same
computer asks you for a name on the hard disk aren't
specific d isk. See "Names of replaced. Instead, the system
Disks and Documents" in creates a folder with the name
Chapter 4. of the source disk, and its
contents are copied into that
folder.

S r11r ! 1111 L11e111 Special

138 Chapter 3: Your Macintosh II Step by Step

-
Using the Installer To use the Installer to
update or install resources
on startup disks

You use the Installer to If you don't update your 1. Start the Macintosh II with the
update startup disks and to startup disks, characters you System Tools disk.
install resources on startup type on your keyboard may

- disks. Printing resources are

system files that usually have
the same names as the
produce the wrong results in
certain applications. For
example, typing "=" may
You can't replace the system
files on the current startup
disk because the system is

- printers themselves.
Peripheral devices such as
hard disks and file servers also
generate "," instead.
Although the Macintosh II lets
using them.
The Installer is in the Utilities
Folder on the System Tools

-
you move items in and out of
have resources. disk. Use it there or copy the
System Folders just as with any
Installer, the System Folder,
It's a good idea to use the other folder, leave the System
the Font/DA Mover, and the
Installer to keep all of your and Finder together in the
Installation Scripts folder to
startup disks current with the same System Folder. Use the
another disk.
latest system files available. Installer to keep each of your
You can see which version of startup disks current rather 2. Open the Installer.
the Finder you're using by than dragging these files
Either select the icon and
choosing About the Finder among startup disks.
choose Open from the File
from the Apple menu. The

- version number should be 5.4

or later. Check with your
authorized Apple deale r for
Applications you purchase
may not include the latest
system files on their startup
menu or double-click the
icon.
3. Insert the startup disk you want

-
disks. If your system doesn't
possible further updates. to update.
include the internal hard disk,
With a startup disk that uses a update each startup disk you If you have only one 3.5-inch
Finder version 4 .1 or earlier, use with your Macintosh II in drive, first eject the disk that
folders and all their contents this same way. If you have a contains the Installer.
may not appear when you hard disk, just copy all your
The Installer will update the

-
choose Open or Save As applications to the hard disk
disk named at the top right. If
within an application, or and start your computer from
that is not the disk you want,
folders may appear empty in the hard disk.
click Drive to search for other
the Finder. Don't worry if this
disks.
happens. Just use the Installer
to update the startup disk.
You r "missing" folders and

- their contents will reappear

the next time you choose
Open or Save As.

-
- Using the Installer 139
4. Select Macintosh II Update If you intend to use the disk
and any other printing you're updating on an
resources you want. Macintosh Il and on another
model of Macintosh
Shift-click to select more than
computer, select Universal
one item in the list.
System Update instead of
As you select each resource, Macintosh II. Universal
the Installer checks the disk's System Update requires more
available memory and disk space, but it lets you use
informs you how much free the disk on most models of
space will be left on the disk the Macintosh computer
after the update is complete. (except the Macintosh 128K).
('This takes a few seconds for
You can use the Font/DA
each selection.)
Mover to customize the disk
5. Click the Install button. with the fonts and desk
accessories you want to use
Installing Macintosh II
with it. See the Macintosh
automatically updates any
System Utilities User's Guide
existing system resources on
for information on the
the disk. You can also select
Font/ DA Mover.
any printing resources you
want to add.
Disk to be updated

lla1d Disk
__ ,.

Applelalk l mageUlnte1 llt?.51 ~I

lmagellh1te1 lll2.51
Lase1 U111te1 IL•3.41 ( J

L! iii0J
( Help ]

( Quit )

fn Please sell't t the I ('\Olli CP\ and thr d1\k you uoant to
l_:U install them on.

140 Chapter 3: Your Macintosh II Step by Step

 The first half of this chapter describes your Apple Macintosh II
computer in general. Although some details may change from
application to application, this is the way your computer usually
works.
"Finder Reference" and "Finder Menus" provide specific
information about the Finder, the application for organizing and
managing your documents. These sections of the chapter describe
the functions and effects of windows, icons, and menus in the
Finder, and also discuss the things the Finder manages.
The last part of this chapter describes some shortcuts you can use
when you are working with your Macintosh II.

What Macintosh II is: Its parts

The basic Apple Macintosh II computer system includes the
monitor, the main unit, the keyboard, and the mouse. The
monitor is where you keep track of what you're doing. The main
unit is really the heart of the computer and contains
o the processor-which does the actual work of the computer
D 1 megabyte (lMB) of memory-where the computer stores the
information you're currently using
o a built-in 800K disk drive-which records and retrieves the
information that's stored on a disk
o an optional hard disk (internal or external)-for added disk
space (20, 40, or 80 megabytes) and greater efficiency and speed
o slots that will accept expansion cards-which allow you to add to
the capabilities of your Macintosh II
Besides getting information from the disk drive, your computer
can also get information directly from you when you use the
keyboard or the mouse, or from other peripheral devices (through
the SCSI port or the serial ports on the back of the main unit).
These computer parts that you can see and touch are called
hardware.

144 Chapter 4: Macintosh II Reference

 Software is the collective term for all the programs your system
uses. For example, the Macintosh II comes with system software
and utilities programs, many of which work behind the scenes
keeping your desktop organized and making it easier for you to do
your work. In addition, there are a great many application
programs you can use-such as MacWrite for words, MacPaint for
pictures, MacDraw for structured graphics, MacTerrninal™ for

- e lectronic communications, and MacProject™ for project

management.
You can add to your basic computer system as your needs grow,
choosing from a large and constantly growing family of hardware
and software products. See Chapter 5, "Expanding Your Macintosh
II System," for a few ideas.

Where does your information go?

When you open an existing document so you can revise it (the
perfect first draft has yet to be created), the computer leaves the
original on the disk and brings a copy into the computer's
memory. When you've finished making changes on the copy, you
decide whether you want to keep the new version or not.
You usually have the option of saving the new version with the
original name, saving it with a different name, or not saving it at all.
If you save the new version with the same name as the original, it
replaces the original on the disk. If you don't use the same name,
with most applications the original on the disk isn't changed. It's
like having an original document and making photocopies of it to
edil. When you've tried diffe rent changes and are satisfied with a
particular version, you can change the original.
Any docu ment you're working on is being held-temporarily-in
the computer's memory. If you accidentally trip over the power
cord or the electricity goes off, everything you've done-but
have n't saved-vanishes forever. So that your work will be there
when you need it, save it on a disk (by choosing Save from the File
menu) every 15 minutes or so. That way you'll never lose more than

Where does your Information go? 145

 a coffee break's worth of work. (With certain data base programs you
can lose everything-even what you've saved-if there's a power
failure of any sort If the work you're doing in a data base is
important, it's a good idea to make frequent backup copies of your
work on a 3. 5-inch disk for insurance.)
•:• Automatic saves: Some applications save changes you make to
a document as soon as you make them; the manual that comes
with the application lets you know if this is the case.

I
Changes you make
to the copy
~
- _::::
~
~~I
Original on disk ~-1
Original on disk
~~J
~ "'\:,
~~
The copy replaces the
original on disk.
Figure 4-1
Where Information goes

The keyboard
Your computer's keyboard includes character keys, numeric keys,
arrow keys, and other special keys. This section gives a brief
description of what the keys do.

146 Chapter 4: Macintosh II Reference

 Figure 4 -2

-
.....
Keyboard

Character keys
The character keys are just like keys on a typewriter. Use them to type
any characte r, including numbers and symbols such as=, (, and $.
Character keys repeat when held down. Use the Control Panel to set
the rate of repeating; see "Using the Control Panel" in Chapter 3.

Numeric keys
In addition to the numerals 1 through 0 along the top of the
keyboard, there is also a built-in numeric 10-key pad on the right
side of the keyboard. For accountants and others who enter a lot of
numbers and use calculators frequently, this pad will be familiar.

Arrow keys

- The arrow keys (sometimes called cursor keys) let you use the
keyboard to move around the compute r screen when it's
inconvenient to use the mouse.

-
The keyboard 147
 Special keys
Some keys are used in combination with character keys to produce ~
I

different characters or to issue menu commands. Others perform

more specific actions. These keys are described below, starting at
the top of the keyboard and moving counterclockwise.
,.... I

Power On
This is the long key at the top of your keyboard. You press it to turn
on your system when it's been turned off.

Esc
Esc stands for Escape, and that's what this key is usually for. Ot
generally means the opposite of Return or Enter.) Pressing Esc
usually cancels a choice or gets you out of tight spots. Not all
applications use Esc.

Tab
The Tab key moves the insertion point horizontally to the next
stopping place (such as a tab stop). In dialog boxes, pressing Tab
~
usually selects the next place to supply information. I

Control
Like the Apple key, the Control key works in combination with other
keys to provide shortcuts or to modify other actions.
.~

Shift
When you hold down the Shift key, character keys produce
uppercase letters or the upper character on the key. Sometimes Shift
modifies other actions: for instance, in the Finder holding down
the Shift key while you click lets you select more than one icon.

Caps Lock i-i I

The Caps Lock key is a Shift key for letters only. When the Caps Lock
key is engaged, letter keys produce uppercase letters, but number
and symbol keys aren't affected.

148 Chapter 4: Macintosh II Reference

 Option
Generally, if you hold down the Option key while you press other
characte r keys, the result will be an op tional character set of
accented and special characte rs. If you press the O ption ke y along
with the Shift key (or Caps Lock), you'll get another version of some
optional characters . Figure 4-3 shows the optional characte rs in the
Chicago font.

~GJ on
l0[] [) GJ
l~ r=1r:-1 o
[] [J~1 L11
la !I_. l _.
Figure 4-3
Optional characters

White = Characters produced by holding down the Option key wh ile you
type anothe r ch aracter
Re d = Characters produced by hold ing down the Option key and the
Shift ke y while you typ e ano ther character
You can use the Key Caps desk accessory to see the optional
characters in any font installed in the current startup disk's Syste m
file . See "Desk Accessories" later in this chapter.
Using the Option key with certain character keys lets you ente r
accented characte rs:
Optio n-' ' (grave accent)
Optio n-e ' (acute accent)
Option-i ~ (circumflex)

- Optio n-u
Optio n-n
··(umlaut)
- (tilde)

-
The keyb oard 149
 Typing the Option key combination followed by another character
produces that character accented with that diacritical mark. (For
example, if you hold down the Option key and press the grave key,
then release those keys and type a, you'll get a- as in a la carte.) If
for some reason a character can't be accented by the mark you've
chosen, you get the mark, followed by the character. Typing the
Option key combination twice gives you the diacritical mark alone.

Apple
Holding down the Apple key (it's the one with the 0 and the
cloverleaf symbols) in combination with another key is often a
shortcut to choosing a command from a menu. When there is an
Apple key equivalent to a command in a menu, it will be listed in the
menu. Sometimes the Apple key modifies other actions: for
instance, holding down the Apple key while typing a period (.)
sometimes cancels a long operation in progress-such as printing.

Important The Apple key has 1wo icons on it: one looks like a cloverleaf.
and the other is an apple. Earlier Macintosh keyboards had just
the cloverleaf, and many applications refer to this key as the
Command key. If your application tells you to press the
Command key, this is the key It means.

Enter
In a dialog box, pressing Enter is the same as clicking the button that
confirms the default command (such as OK) or the outlined button
if there is one. In lhis context, Enter and Return operate the same
way. Certain software applications (such as spreadsheet programs
or data base managers) will require that you press Enter (not Return)
when you want to put data into specific fields.

Clear
Clear deletes the current selection, just as the Delete key does. In
some applications, Clear may have other functions. See each
application's manual.

~
' I

150 Chapter 4: Macintosh II Reference

 Delete
The Delete key deletes the current selection. When the selection is
simply the insertion point, Delete backs over and deletes text.

Return
The Return key moves the insertion point to the beginning of the
next line. In a dialog box, pressing Return is the same as clicking the
button that confirms the default command (such as OK) or the
outlined button if there is one.

Disks

- Disks store information and come in different sizes and shapes. The
next few sections apply mostly to 3.5-inch disks. Hard disks are
discussed in more detail in Chapter 5, "Expanding Your Macintosh
II System," and in Appendix A, "Working With Hard Disks."
Apple 3.5-inch double-sided disks store 800 kilobytes (800K), o r
about 160 pages per disk, and are labeled Double Sided. Some
space on each disk is used for keeping track of the disk's contents.
(This is where the disk's directory information is stored.) The
amount of space set aside for the directory depends on how much
information is on the disk.

- Initializing disks
Before your Macintosh II can get information from or save
information to disks, the disks need to be initialized in a format
your computer understands. (A blank disk is like a parking lot

-
without divider lines. Before it can "park the cars," your computer
has to "draw in the white lines.") Any time you insert an

Disks 151
 uninitialized disk or a disk your computer can't read (because it's
damaged or it's initialized for a different kind of computer), a
message appears asking you (1) if you'd like to initialize the disk for
the computer and (2) whether you want to iriitialize the disk to be
one-sided or two-sided.
The Macintosh H's BOOK disk drive(s) can read disks initialized with
either a one-sided or a two-sided format, and can use the older-
style 400K disks. In other words, it's all right to use a combination of
one-sided and two-sided, 400K and SOOK disks.
If you're using SOOK disks, you'll usually initialize them with a two-
- I

sided format. This kind of initialization gives you the full SOOK of
space on the disks so that you can use both sides of the disk to store
applications and data. It also gives you the hierarchical file system
(letting you use folders within applications as well as in the Finder).
The one-sided format gives you only 400K of storage and normally
gives a "flat" directory system, in which the titles of folders don't
show up in the directory window when you store or retrieve ...
' l
documents within applications.

Important Be sure to Initialize 400K disks to be one-sided only. Although

the computer will sometimes let you initialize a 400K disk to be
two-sided. the second side of the disk has not been tested for
reliablllty, and you'll regret the decision to Initialize both sides
the day you lose all the Information on the disk.
If you've lnltiallzed an SOOK disk two-sided, you cannot use it in
a 400K disk drive. If you try, a dialog box asks if you want to
initialize the disk with a format the drive can read. Clicking
Initialize erases all the Information on the disk.

If you are using an application and insert an unformatted disk, you

can initialize the disk from within the application without losing any
information currently in the computer's memory.
You can also initialize disks that have information on them by using
the Erase Disk command in the Special menu in the Finder. This
erases everything on the disk and asks whether you want to
reinitialize the disk.
Table 4-1 shows specific information on which disks to use in which
drive.

152 Chapter 4: Macintosh II Reference

,._
Table 4-1
Disks and drives
,_..
400K disk drive SOOK disk drive

400K disk yes yes•

initialized
one-sided
,..., BOOK disk yes yest
initialized
one-sided
SOOK disk no yes
initialized
two-sided
• You might want to copy applications from 400K disks to two-sided SOOK
disks. Some applications, however, may be copy-protected. You can
continue to use these applications from one-sided 400K disks. You can
always copy a 400K data disk to an SOOK disk, and gain the extra 400K
for your own work.
t SOOK disks can be initialized to be one-sided, but you'll be able to use
only 400K on the disk and you won't see folders within applications on
this disk.

Locked disks
You can prevent any information on a 3.5-inch disk from being
changed by sliding the colored tab toward the edge of the disk
(revealing a small hole). This is called locking a disk. You can lock
specific documents and applications (and folders, if you're using a
file server such as AppleShareTM) by choosing Get Info from the File

- menu. See Locking a Document or Application" in Chapter 3 for

instructions.
11

When a disk is locked, you can't add new information to it or change

any information on it. You can open (and usualiy print) the
documents it contains, but you won't be able to save, delete,
rename, move, duplicate, or change any information on it.
To allow the disk to be altered again, slide the tab to cover the hole.

....
Disks 153
 •!• Locked disks and applications: Some applications might not
work with a locked disk, and the Finder can't remember
anything you've done on the desktop when you're using a locke d
disk. Some desk accessories might not work properly if the
current startup disk is locked.

Figure 4-4
Locking and unlocking a disk

Names of disks and documents

Every disk, document, application, and folder has a name. You
name disks when you initialize them, you name documents when
you save them for the first time (some applications make you name
a document as soon as you create it), and you usually name folders
when you create them. You can change a name at any time with the
Finder.
There are a few restrictions to the names you can give. A disk name
can contain up to 27 characters (including spaces); a document or
folder name can contain up to 31 characters.
A name can't contain a colon (:). O ther than that, you can use any
characters you can type on the keyboard. n

154 Chapter 4: Macintosh II Reference

 You can have multiple documents or folders with the same name as
long as they're in separate folders and the disk is initialized two-
sided (or is a hard disk) and allows fo r the hierarchical file system.
You can't have two items with the same name in the same folder.
When comparing names, your computer considers uppercase and
lowercase letters to be equal, so Saturday and Saturday are the
same.

Important Don't g ive documents the same name as applications. If you

move a document named MacWrlte to a folder that has the
MacWrlte application in it. you'll be asked if you want to
replace the existing MacWrite. Clicking OK w ill destroy the
application and replace It with the document.

It's a good idea to give disks unique names. Sometimes you r

computer will ask you for a specific disk by name, and it's confusing
to have a lot of disks with that same name. (Your computer can be
very picky about which one it wants.) It's also a good idea to write
each disk's name on its labe l.

Startup disks
The System Tools disk that came with your computer contains
system files the computer needs to get itself started. Disks that
contain these files are called startup disks.
These system files are stored in the System Folder. Because the
computer expects to find them there w hen it needs to use them, you
should keep them in the System Folder.
A startup disk always includes in the System Folder at least a System
file and a Finder file (both represented by Macintosh icons). It also
usually includes at least one printing resource, such as the
ImageWriter, AppleTalk ImageWriter, LaserWriter, or LaserWriter
Prep file. You should also find other files on a startup
disk-Scrapbook file, Clipboard file, and so on. These files contain
information that's used only by certain applications and desk
accessories.

Startup d isks 155

 ~
I

Besides giving your computer the information it needs to get itself

started, the System Folder on the startup disk determines
o which fonts you have available when you use an application (in
the System file on the startup disk you're using)
o which desk accessories are in the Apple menu (also in the System ~
I
file)
o what's in the Scrapbook desk accessory (whatever's in the
~
Scrapbook file on the startup disk) I

o which version of the Finder you're using

o which devices can be controlled by the Control Panel ,...I

If you don't have a hard disk

If you don't have a hard disk, you may need to use the Installer on
the System Tools disk to update the system files on your application ,...,
!
disks before using them as startup disks. After you update an
application's startup disk, you will be able to use it as a startup disk
on most earlier models of the Macintosh computer (the exception
is the Macintosh 128K).
•:• 400K disks?If you have applications on 400K disks, do not try
to convert those disks to startup disks. Obere probably isn't
room.) Instead, you'll have to start the computer from another
disk, then insert the 400K application disk and start the
application.
See "Using the Installer" in Chapter 3 for instructions on how to
update disks with the latest system software.

Customizing startup disks

Fonts and desk accessories are kept in the System file (inside the
System Folder). You can use the Font/DA Mover (Font and Desk
Accessory Mover) to customize the System file on a startup disk so
that it contains your most useful fonts and desk accessories. (You
can't just open the System files and drag things back and forth.)

156 Chapter 4: Macintosh II Reference

An application you purchase might have special fonts or desk
accessories suited to thal particular application. The Font/DA
Mover lets you copy these to the System file on any other startup
disk (as long as there's room on the disk, of course). See the
Macintosh System Utilities User's Guide for instructions on using
the Font/DA Mover.
You can also drag other files (not fonts or desk accessories) from
the System Folder on one disk to the System Folder on the startup
disk you are customizing. For example, you might want a copy of a
Scrapbook file-lo have different Scrapbook contents available
from time to lime.

The current startup disk

When you turn on your compute r, it looks for a startup disk-the
disk whose syste m files the computer will use. Because you can have
startup disks in diffe rent drives at the same time, you r computer uses
an order of precede nce in looking for a startup disk. Searching in
this order, it uses the first startup device it finds:
o right-hand disk drive
o left-hand disk drive (if the re is one)
o startup device set in the Control Panel
o internal hard disk
o devices connected to the SCSI port in declining device priority
number (from 6 to 0)
See "Using the Control Panel" in Chapte r 3 to learn about setting a
startup device .
If you have an external hard disk, see "Drive" in Appendix A and
the manual that came with the disk lo read about SCSI device
priority numbers.

Switc hing startup disks

The startup disk is the one whose icon appears in the top-right
corner of you r desktop. Sometimes you want to switch to a different
startup disk while you're working- another startup disk might have
special desk accessories or fonts you want to use. (And sometimes
the Macintosh II will switch startup disks because of an action you've
taken, whether you wanted to switch or noL)

Startup disks 157

 ~
I

The Macintosh II switches to a different startup disk whenever you do

any of the following: ,_.
o You restart the computer using a different startup disk.
o You restart the computer after you've changed the startup device
(from the Control Panel).
o You hold down the Option key while you open an application
that's on another startup disk.
o You hold down the Option and Apple keys while you double-dick
the Finder icon on the disk you want to switch to. (Don't hold
down these keys too long or the Rebuild Desktop dialog box will
appear.)

Arranging your work on disks efficiently

In general, how you arrange your work on disks depends on the size
of your system, the printer or printers you're using, and the way you
want to organize your work. Your computer lets you arrange
documents, folders, and applications however you want on your
disks. (See "Copying or Moving a Document, Folder, or
Application" and "Removing or Recovering a Document, Folder,
or Application" in Chapter 3.)
o If you're using a system with a hard disk, you can keep everything
on it: System Folder, applications, and documents. Use 3.5-inch
disk drives to make backup copies and to hold applications that
can't be moved to the hard disk because of copy protection.
o If you're using a system with two 3.5-inch disk drives (and no hard
disk), you might decide to keep more than one application on a
..,
startup disk in the right-hand disk drive and keep documents you
create with those applications on nonstartup disks in the left- ~
hand disk drive. I

o If you're using a one-drive system, you can minimize the amount

of disk-swapping you have to do by keeping just one application _,
I
and the documents you create with it on a startup disk. (Your
computer asks you to swap disks when it can't find the
information it needs on the currently inserted disk.)

158 Chapter 4: Macintosh II Reference ~

I
 It's a good idea to keep about 50K available on your startup disks.
CTnformation about the space available appears in the window for
that disk, below the title. You can also select the startup d isk and
choose Get Info from the File menu to see how much space is free.)
Applications usually need a little working space on the current
startup disk, even when the document you're working on is on
another disk.
If you need more space on your startup disks-if you have AppleTalk
and a LaserWriter with many fonts installed in your System file, for
example-you can keep applications together with documents on
nonstartup disks in an alternate drive. (Nonstartup disks do not have
a System Folder containing the System and Finder files.)
There are a couple of things you can do to save space on startup
disks:
o Drag any printing resources you don't need to the Trash (making

- sure you have backup copies of these resources in case you need
them in the future). For example, if you exclusively use an
ImageWriter directly attached to your computer, you can drag
the AppleTalk ImageWriter and AppleTalk LaserWriter files to the
Trash.
o Remove fonts or desk accessories you don't need from its System
file. See the section on the Font/DA Mover in Macintosh System
Utilities User's Guide.
•:• Outgrowing your disks? When the information you need
spreads to more disks than you can easily handle, the best
solution is a hard disk drive. With it, you can keep everything on
the hard disk and use 3.5-inch disks just co move information to
or from the hard disk. See Chapter 5 for a description of
Apple's hard disk drives.

- Windows
Windows present information. You can have multiple windows on
your desktop so you can view more than one set of information at
the same time. Most windows can be moved , changed in size,
scrolle d through, or closed. Windows can also overlap each other.
When more than one window is open, one is frontmost and that's
where all the action happens. Clicking anywhere in a window brings
it to the front and makes it active.

- Windows 159
 Although a window might be "buried" unde r others, it cannot be
dragged completely off the screen or made so small that you can't
see it

-
•
-I 1le
- -f d1t
-- -
ll1e111 S11ec lill Key l dPS

--s-~-os-~Pim-~-oulls ~ _...__ __
Info _-'"
n
Ut1l1t1e\ r older
Key Caps

i
Tf~S"h
ii
Figure 4-5
Overlapping windows

Windows might behave a little differently within an application. See

e ach application's manual for an explanation of windows in that
application.

The Clipboard: Cutting and pasting

You can move information within a document, among documents
created with the same application, among documents created with
different applications, or among desk accessories and documents. -
The information you're moving or copying is held on the
Clipboard. The Cut, Copy, and Paste commands in the Edit menu
let you move information between the Clipboard and the active
window. Most applications have a Show Clipboard command in
their Edit menu that shows you the current contents of the
Clipboard.

160 Chapter 4: Macintosh II Reference

- Within an application, information sent to the Clipboard keeps
attributes such as text sizes and sryles, or any altributes unique lo
that application. When moving between applications, usually o nly
the text or the picture, in a fixed format, is exchanged. Attributes
are often left behind.
The Clipboard contents are kept in the computer's memory, as lo ng
as the computer doesn't need the memory for something more
pressing. If the Clipboard's conte nts grow too large, they are
temporarily saved in the Clipboard file on the current startup disk.

Dialog boxes
\Vhenever your computer needs more information from you, it
displays a dialog box with bunons to click and sometimes with space
for you to enter additional information (such as the name for a new
docume nt).

- . .
[ 61 Conespondenc e
:::i letter to George 10 13
.
I

.
D Letter to Linda 12/2
D letter to Roy 319
CJ Letters to Carol
CJ Personal Marl
.,~
" ( Cantel --;

Figure 4-6
A dialog box

If you're about to do something that could make you lose

information, a message in the dialog box alerts you and asks you to
confirm that you want to go ahead anyway. In boxes with these
messages, one of the buttons-the "safest" alternative-is usually
boldly outlined. Pressing Enter or Return is the same as clicking the
boldly outlined button or, if the re isn't one, the button that
confirms the command.

- Dialog boxes 161

 A warning message might have one or more Ale rt Sou nds along with
iL If loud sounds annoy you, use the Control Panel desk accessory
to lower the speaker volume. (If you turn the speaker volume all the
way off, the menu bar blinks to warn you even more subtly.) See
"Using the Control Panel" in Chapter 3.

Desk accessories
You choose desk accessories from the Apple menu on the far left
side of the menu bar. Desk accessories are available while you're
using the Finder or most applications.
You can use the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands in the Edit menu
to move or copy text or pictures among some desk accessories (Lhe
Scrapbook and Nole Pad, for example) or to or from anothe r
window. See "Editing Text" in Chapter 3.
With most applications, you can keep one or more desk accessories
open on your desktop while you work on documents. Other windows
that are made active may obscure desk accessories. You make
accessories active by clicking them o r choosing them again from
the Apple menu, and you move them by dragging their Litle bars.
-
You close the m either by clicking the ir close boxes or by choosing
Close from the File menu. n
With some applications (MacPaint, for example), you need to close
desk accessories in order to work on a document.
All desk accessories are closed automatically when you open a
document or application from the Finder or whe n you quit an
application.
The Apple me nu usually contains the accessories that arc installed
in the Syste m me on the current startup disk.

162 Chapter 4: Macintosh II Reference

 Alarm Clock

- Alarm button - - - - -.,

Time _ _ _ _ _ _ __
- - - - - - Lever

Figure 4-7
Alarm Clock
When you choose Alarm Clock, a compact clock displays the hour,
minute, and second. To see more, click the lever on the right side
of the time. (Click the lever again to go back to the compact clock.)
With the lever down, two more panels appear. The bottom panel
displays icons for time, date, and alarm. Select one of these icons,
then use the middle panel to "set" whatever you selected.
Set what's currently displayed in the middle panel by clicking the
digits you want to change. Arrows appear on the right. Click the up

- or down arrow to scroll the numbers higher or lower. Or use the

keyboard to type the numbers. Press the Tab key to move to the next
field (for example, from month to day to year).
To set the alarm, first click the Alarm icon. Then click the alarm
button on the left side of the middle panel. You'll notice that the
Alarm Clock icon now displays small radiating lines, signifying that
it's set to make a sound at the appropriate time. The computer
makes an Alert Sound when the alarm goes off, and the Apple menu
title blinks until you unset the alarm by clicking the alarm button off.
(Choosing Alarm Clock from the Apple me nu also turns the alarm
off, but it doesn't unset it.)
When the clock is active, the time and date are automatically
selected (even though they aren't highlighted), so you can copy and
paste them into the document you're working on or into a desk
accessory that accepts text
You can also change the time and date using the Control Panel. See
"Control Panel" later in this chapter and "Using the Control Panel"
in Chapter 3.

-
- Desk accessories 163
 Calculator

Figure 4-8
Calculator
The Calculator works like an ordinary four-function pocket
calculato r. To operate it, click the buttons or use the keyboard.
(You can also use the 10-key pad, o f course.)
You can copy the calculation results (which are automatically
selected) and paste them into any document or anolher desk
accessory. You can also copy numbers from a document and paste
them into the calculator's display.

Chooser

Chooser ~-
n
Select ti LaserWntJ?r

~"
r;:.21 Pd:J
New York
~ Chicago
~ppleT.alk I Jma9 ...\i'nter
Sen Francisco
New Or~e.;r s
iiiiii
~
!mt;!Mm

AppleTell Zones
um - User flame
Production Rasmussen
Research
Sales ApplPTelY.
·'.!'A' · 1v'='
r,ecl 1ve
;. 0

Figure 4-9
Chooser

164 Chapter 4: Macintosh II Reference

 A zone Is a network that is The Chooser lets you choose devices (usually printers) connected
port of o series of inter-
connected networks.
directly to the Macintosh ll's Printer and Modem ports, or devices
Connecting networks on an AppleTalk network. If you have wnes on your AppleTalk
together makes it possible network, the Chooser lets you scan those zones for devices in them.
to have larger networks
and toke advantage of
You also use the Chooser to connect o r disconnect the AppleTalk
more shored devices network.
(printers. for example). For
m ore information. see The Chooser lets you select any device or print from any attached
"AppleTalk Personal printer for which there's a resource on the current startup disk.
Network"ln Chapter 5.
The System Tools disk includes printing resources for the
ImageWriter (which work with either an lmageWriter or an
A resource is a system file ImageWriter II), LaserWriter, and AppleTalk ImageWriter (which
that appears on the
startup d isk and makes it lets you use an ImageWriter II with an installed AppleTalk card on
possible for your system AppleTalk). You can use the Chooser Lo print on any of these
to communicate w ith printers.
devices (such as printers
and the mouse). These To use the Chooser to print with a LaserWriter or AppleTalk
tiles usually have the
same name as the device
ImageWriter, to connect to a file server, or to select a printer on
they support. an Appletalk network (assuming these resources a re available to
you), see "Using the Chooser" in Chapte r 3.
To read more about AppleTalk and about zones, see "AppleTalk
Personal Network" in Chapte r 5.

Control Panel

--~~
- - -- --
c ont101 r.1ne1

t 'd

,, '

Figure 4-10
Contro l Pane l

- Desk accessories 165

 The Control Panel lets you set your preferences for such things as
speaker volume, repeating key rate, location of the startup disk, and
even the background pattern and color of your desktop. The
Control Panel settings are remembered by the computer itself and
aren't affected by the current startup disk. (This is in contrast to the
Chooser settings, most of which are stored in the System file of the
current startup disk.) When you switch your system off, the built-in
battery provides power for the computer to remember the settings.
See "Using the Control Panel" in Chapter 3.

Monitors and the Control Panel

The Monitor part of the Control Panel offers a number of choices-
whether you have one monochrome monitor or six color monitors
connected to your Macintosh II system. Here are some general rules
you should understand:
o The choices you make can be changed when your needs change.
o Some of your choices will depend on whether a monitor is color
or monochrome.
o Some of your choices will depend on how many monitors you
have.
If you have one monitor, you use this panel to specify color or
monochrome, to select the number of colors or grays you want
to see on your screen, and (on a color monitor) to test color
convergence.
If you have multiple monitors (all connected to your Macintosh
II), you make the same choices described above. You can also
position your monitors to suit your needs and fine tune the way
they relate to each other.
This is where having multiple monitors gets to be fun! Depending
on how you've arranged your monitors, you can take advantage
of multiple screens to coordinate a large-scale display of a single
item. For example, with four monitors lined up side by side, you
~
can display a train-caboose on the leftmost screen, engine on I

the rightmost screen, and other cars in between. Or with six

monitors stacked in twos, side by side, you can show one large
spreadsheet.
For instructions on using this part of the Control Panel, see "To Set
Monitor Status for a Single Monitor" or "To Set Monitor Status for
Multiple Monitors" in Chapter 3.

166 Chapter 4: Macintosh II Reference

. :
 Find File

fl
_l [IJ

Tu. f~~·- IQ 7 10 ~.1,...,1 Ul1ht1e~ I olclrr

Ty• F•b 17 I~ 10 24 .\'1 (gJ Sy~ tern Tool\
..... 1-:;5 ~t .. !
.... n dloi

Figure 4-1 1
Find File
Find File helps you locate folders and files on your disks. This desk
accessory becomes more and more useful as the numbe r of files you
have grows-for example, when you have a hard disk.
You type keywords in Find File's Search for box. Find File searches
through your disk, and then displays the names of all files and
folders that have those keywords as part of their name. When you
select a name from the list, Find File gives you information about it:
when it was created and last changed, how big it is, and so on. Find
File also shows you the path through the hierarchical file system that
you take to get to that file.
Because searches on hard disks with lots of files can take a while,
Find File lets you begin a search and the n go back to work on
something e lse. Ot beeps when it's finished searching.) Once your
search is complete, you can select a file and have Find File move it
to the desktop for you.
See "Using Find File" in Chapte r 3.

- Desk accessories 167

 Key Caps

_K_elJ C11p_s--'--

IThis is o test I

Figure 4-1 2
Key Caps
When I.he Key Caps desk accessory is I.he aclive window, a Key Caps
me nu appears in the me nu bar. The menu always contains I.he fonL'>
installed in I.he current startup disk's System file. (These are the
fonts I.hat will be available in any application you use with this
startup disk.) Choosing a font lets you see its characters in I.he Key
Caps window as Lhey'd appear as typed text. With any font you
choose, you can use the Option, Shift, and Caps Lock keys to see the
characte rs each key or combination o f keys produces.
Text you type on I.he keyboard or enter by dicking Key Caps keys
appears in I.he text box al I.he top of I.he Key Caps window. You can
edit I.his text in I.he usual way and cut and paste it among al.her desk
accessories o r any document.
With the Key Caps desk accessory aclive, press the O ption, Shift, or
Caps Lock key or press I.he Option and Shift keys together; the Key
Caps desk accessory displays the characters you can type while
holding down that key or combination of keys.
See "The Keyboard" earlie r in I.his chapter to learn how to produce
accented cha racters using the diacritical marks in the optional
characte r set.
-

168 Chapter 4: Macintosh II Re ference

 Note Pad
~o~ Note Pact~ With the Note Pad, you can jot down a few notes and keep them
separate from the document you're working on. Or you can type text
and edit it even if you're using an application that doesn't allow text
editing in the usual way. Use the Edit menu to cut and paste text into
and out of the Note Pad when you want to preseive a snippet of
information in a handy place.
You have 8 numbered pages of Note Pad paper, each holding just
over 500 typed characters. Turn to the next page by clicking the
turned-back corner of the top page. Turn to the preceding page by
clicking the bottom-left corner of the Note Pad.
Notes you type are automatically saved and stored in the Note Pad
file on the current startup disk. You can copy Note Pad files among
Figure 4-13 disks or remove them to gain space on the disks. You can keep more
Note Pad than one Note Pad file on the same disk by renaming all but one of
them or keeping them in other folders. Give the name Note Pad to
the one you want to use, and be sure it's in the System Folder. When
you choose Note Pad from the Apple menu, you always see the Note
Pad whose contents are in the same folder as the System file and
Finder on the current startup disk.

-
Scrapbook

Scrapbook

Downtown Office Ouupancy Rate

-
~~~-1_9_B5~~1_9_B6~~1-9B_7~~19~

[] I~ l

Figure 4-14
Scrapbook

Desk accessories 169

 Keep in the Scrapbook pictures and text you freque ntly use. You
might keep your letterhead the re, or illustrations fro m your favorite
graphics program. Paste something you cut or copied from another

-
desk accessory or a document. And copy or cut the current picture
or text (which is automatically selected) to paste into other
documents or desk accessories. Use the scroll bar to look through
the Scrapbook.
The contents of the Scrapbook are stored in the Scrapbook file on
the current startup disk. You can copy Scrapbook files among disks
or remove them to gain space on the disks. You can keep more than
one Scrapbook file on the same disk by renaming all but one of
them or keeping it in another folder. (Your computer uses the one
named Scrapbook.) When you choose Scrapbook from the Apple
menu, you always see the Scrapbook whose contents are in the same
folder as the System file and Finder on the current startup disk.
See "Using the Scrapbook" in Chapter 3.

TeachText
TeachText is an uncomplicated application that lets you write, read,
and edit your own text documents. If you went through the tutorial in
Chapter 2, you used TeachText and learned some basics.
TeachText also provides a means for Apple Compute r and other
software developers to make sure that the information you get on a
Figure 4-15
new product is as up-to-date as possible. Whe n you open an
TeachText icon
application's directory window and see a Read Me document, the
document contains last-minute information that probably couldn't
be included in the application's manual. (It's a lot quicker to create
a document on the disk than it is to produce an insert for a book!)
You use TeachText to gain access to this Read Me info rmation.
The TeachText application is on the Utilities disk, and any Read Me
documents are contained in an Update Folder, also on that disk.
There are two ways to get to TeachText documents you want to read:
o Open the TeachText application (by selecting its icon and
choosing Open from the File menu or by double-clicking on the
TeachText icon). The first window you see will be empty and will
say Untitled in the title bar. Close the window (by clicking the
close box or by choosing Close from the file me nu). Then

170 C hapte r 4: Macintosh II Reference

 choose Open from the File menu, and a dialog box appears with
the names of folders and documents (including the Read Me
documents) you can read in TeachText. Select and open the
document you want to read. (You can also use TeachText to read

- text-only documents you've created in your favorite word

processor.)
o 1n the Finder, open the Update Folder by selecting its icon and
choosing Open from the File menu or by double-clicking on the
icon. Then select and open any document you want to read. The
TeachText application will start automatically.
You can print any document that appears in the TeachText window,
but you will not be able to change any part of a Read Me document.
When you are using TeachText to write your own documents, you
can use all the normal editing functions. You can cut or copy from
TeachText to the Clipboard, and you can paste what you put on the
Clipboard. However, you will not be able to open up the Clipboard
to see what's on it.
If you want to try using TeachText to write or edit something, go
through the tutorial in Chapter 2.

Finder reference
The Finde r is the application for managing documents and
directing traffic between you and the disk.
Common Finder tasks include
o opening, closing, copying, discarding, moving, and renaming
documents, folders, applications, and disks
o organizing documents, applications, and folders on the desktop,
in folders, and on disks

- o ejecting disks
o initializing disks
o write-protecting documents
o getting information about your folders, docume nts, and
applications with the Get Info command from the File menu
o turning off your computer with the Shut Down command from
the Special menu

- Finder reference 171

 ,._.
I I

Some of the Finder's capabilities are also available while you 're
using an application. You can open new documents, save work on a
disk (using the same folders that appear in the Finder), examine the ·~ \
I

contents of disks and their folders, eject disks, print the current
document, or return to a previous version of a document without
returning to the Finder.
_,
\

You work in the Finder by selecting and dragging icons, by double-

11
clicking, and by choosing commands from menus. (See Selecting
11
Icons, "Dragging Icons, and "Finder Menus'' later in this
11

chapter.)

What the Finder manages

Applications and documents

Applications and documents are represented in their closed state as
icons (or as a list in a text view). You can open, close, rename,
duplicate, discard, or organize applications and documents on
disks and in folders.

Disks
You see the contents of disks in directory windows. Disks can
contain system files, documents, applications, and folders. Each
item is represented by an icon that you can select and drag; you can
choose to see disks' contents arranged in several ways with the View
menu.
A disk newly inserted into a disk drive appears as a black disk icon
(that is, it's automatically selected). The icon becomes dimmed
when you open its window.

Ejected disks
How you choose to eject a disk determines what's there for the
Finder to manage.
__,
If you choose Eject from the File menu, the disk will be ejected and a I I
dimmed icon will stay on the desktop. The Macintosh II will
remember the contents of that disk as long as the dimmed icon is

172 Chapter 4: Macintosh II Reference

 there. You can open the disk icon (or any folder inside it) into a
directory window; however, any items in the window will also
appear dimmed. (You can drag a dimmed icon just as you would an
icon that's not dimmed.)
As long as the ejected disk's icon remains on the desktop, the Finder
will ask you to reinsert the ejected disk any time it is needed. If you
want to avoid this, drag the ejected disk's icon to the Trash to
remove it.
If you drag the disk to the Trash, the disk will be ejected and its icon
will be removed from the desktop. Tilis leaves nothing behind for
the Finder to manage, and many times that's exactly what you want

Important If the disk Icon you drag to the Trash is the current startup disk,
its dimmed Icon will remain on the desktop. You will not be able
to remove or open the Icon without reinserting the startup disk.
(Or you can choose Shut Down from the Special menu, Insert
another startup disk, and press the Power On key to start
again.)

See "Startup Disks" and "Arranging Your Work on Disks Efficiently"

earlier in this chapter for more information about disks.

The desktop
The desktop in the Finder is a handy temporary resting place for
icons. If you're concentrating on only a few documents and
applications at a time, and they're on different disks or in different
folders, you can drag all the documents to the desktop and work on
them there. You can even close the windows for the folders and
disks they came from; the Finder will remember where the
documents belong.
You can put icons back where they came from by selecting them on
the desktop and choosing Put Away from the File menu .
....

Finder reference 173

 The Trash
The Trash is a receptacle for files and folders you want to throw
away. When you discard a folder, the folder and its entire contents
disappear.
You can't throw away anything on a locked disk or any documents
that have been individually locked; you must unlock the disk or file
first.
When you open the Trash icon, it shows the last few files you
discarded. You can recover those files by dragging them out of the
Trash back onto the desktop.
As something goes into the Trash, the icon will "bulge.,, If you want
to empty it-and reclaim the space the discarded files take
up~hoose Empty Trash from the Special menu. In fact, whether
you empty it or not, files stay in the Trash only for a short while. The
Finder empties the Trash when it needs the space, as well as any
time you start an application or choose Shut Down or Restart from
the Special menu.
Dragging a disk to the Trash ejects the disk and removes its icon
from the desktop; it has no effect on the contents of the disk. (If the
disk is the current startup disk, dragging its icon to the Trash ejects it
but leaves the dimmed icon on the desktop.)

Folders ...
'
Use folders to arrange your applications, documents, and other
files in ways that make sense to you. You can leave your
applications, documents, and other files in the disk window, or you
can put them in folders. (You make new folders by using the New
Folder command in the File menu.) You can even put folders within
other folders. See the next section, "The Hierarchical File System,"
for more information on using folders.
To see the contents of a folder, open the folder just as you would a
disk icon-by selecting the folder icon and choosing Open from the
File menu or double-clicking on the icon. The folder icon opens
into a directory window.

174 Chapter 4: Macintosh II Reference

- r

' r

,.\", .F

- Figure 4-16
Placing one folder Inside another

- The hierarchical file system

Folders let you arrange your applications and docu ments in a
hierarchy. When you open a disk and see a folder (or file) in the
disk's direclory window, you're looking at the Lop level of the
hie rarchy. When you open that folder, you see another window that
shows you what's inside-probably more files and folders. Now

-
you're looking at the second level of the hierarchy. If when you
open one of the folders on this second level you see yet another
folde r, that folde r will open onto the third level-and so on.
You can nest files (that is, place files and folders within other
folders within othe r folders, and so on) as deeply as you like. Most
people, however, find that retrieving a file nested more than four
levels deep becomes tedious.

Finder reference 175

 ___ tliu~~ 01\k j Work
Startup
I
\11~1t·m I ohSPr

(il•l!lJi!mJmJ:llJftliJlMIZill·i·iJI@ali- - - -
...,.~ Z. tilork \ldl tu

,---.!J_N I
I Disk

~)(>fl

~fPI

System Work In
Folder Progress
, Lllor k 111 Pr uq11•H I
0 Corre\pondence Z Ulurk \ltJr tu
.i "'1tlll'111Jl't I\
' 111 llu 11\1 [ire t

.1--,~--
.1-,.___._
l
r IHH Pl
Corres- To Do
Mac Projects
pondence List

. ( Olll'\llOIHlt'll(l! I

..
"
Ulfut• ""11•mo\
P1 OIJU\dl

() Ru4ult4 'iil'tJUl1t1l1Ull\
1
.~ lllOI k \lcH Ill

L
r
t1e11 J
_,- , 1 ~ II~ l~
Royalty
r Oprn Office Proposal Revised Ne go-
.J
' Memos Proposal
= rancrl ; tiations

Figure 4- 17
Hierarchical file struct ure

Luckily, you don't have to worry about misplacing a file, even a

deeply nested one. If you know its name, you can find any file or
folder by using Find File. See "Find File" earlier in this chapter.

Within applications
The hierarchcial file system can be especially he lpful when you're
working within an application. Whenever you choose Open or Save
As from the File menu within an application or save a document for
the first time using the Save command, you see the same hierarchy
of folders you created in the Finder (as long as the disk is initialized
appropriately). See the sections on initializing disks in Chapter 3
and this chapter and "Managing Documents Within an
Application" in Chapter 3.

176 Chapter 4: Macintosh II Reference

 A dialog box appears with a directory of the curre nt folder or disk.
The directory name (and a folder or disk icon) is above the
alphabetized list of the directory's contents; the name of the current
disk (and a disk icon) appears to the right.

~ Pro1etl\ 87
Ejec I

ScH•e current document

Cant el

'---=====================1]
Figure 4- 18
Directory dialog box

- The folders in this directory dialog box correspond to the ones you
create in the Finder, with one notable difference: these folders show
only the documents the current application can open, even if the
corresponding folders in the Finder contain other documents or
applications.
You open these folders in the same way you open folders in the
Finder-by selecting the m and choosing Open or by double-
clicking on them. You can also use the arrow keys (or drag the
mouse) to move up and down the list of names until you find what
you want to select and open.
You can move through the entire hierarchy of folders in this same
way, opening folders within the currently open folder, until you
reach the document you want to open.
•:• A shortcut when you know what you want: If you know the
name of a document or folde r in the current di rectory and want
to select it quickly, type the characte r or characters you want to
find. As you type each character, the system highlights any
documents or folders that "qualify." For example, as you type
M, the selection bar moves to the first name beginning with M in
the list. As soon as you type a second letter, the system will find

Finder reference 177

 the first name that begins with both letters, and so on.
However, if you are hesitant and pause too long while typing, '91itI
the next character you type is considered a new request rather
than a continuation of the old. (The Delay Until Repeat setting
in the Control Panel controls how long the pause can be before
subsequent typing begins a new request)
When you choose Open or Save As, the first directory you see is for
the folder (or disk if you're at the top level) that you last saved a ..., \
document to or opened a document from. You can move up or
down the hierarchy to open or save documents.
You can keep documents or folders with the same name on the same
disk, as long as they're in different folders.

Selecting icons
Clicking an icon once selects it (Clicking it twice opens it) Once an
icon is selected, the Edit menu commands operate on that icon's
name (unless it's locked), and the File menu commands work on
what the icon represents.
When more than one icon is selected, the editing commands in the
Edit menu are dimmed.
You can select a group of icons only if they're all in the same
window or all on the desktop. If you want to work on a number of
documents in different folders or disks, drag them to the desktop
,.. I

and select them all there.

Operations on a group of icons are usually performed one by
one-printing a group of documents, for example.

Dragging icons
Dragging an icon from one place to another moves that icon to the
new place. You can drag an icon onto the desktop; to the Trash
icon, a folder, or a disk; or into an open folder, disk, or Trash
window.

--i
I '

178 Chapter 4: Macintosh II Reference

 Dragging an icon from one place to another on the same disk
(including to a folder on the same disk) merely moves the icon to
the new place. Dragging an icon to another disk (including to a
folder on that disk) makes a copy and leaves the original behind for
safekeeping. Of you don't want the original left behind, just drag it
to the Trash afterward.)
If you drag an icon to another disk and there's already an item with
,.. that same name on that disk, you're asked if you want to replace it
with the icon you're dragging. an other words, if you drag the
application MacWrite to a disk with a folder named MacWrlte,
you'll be asked to confirm that you want to replace the folder with
the application. If you say yes, you'll lose what was there.)
Table 4-2 summarizes what happens when you drag icons to
different places on the desktop.

Table 4-2
~
Dragging icons

To a folder on To a folder on Toa

Dragging ... the same disk a different disk different disk To a hard disk To the Trash

document Moves it there Copies it there Copies it there Copies it there Discards it
...
A

A folder Moves it Copies it and Copies it and Copies it and Discards it and
there its contents its contents its contents its contents
there there there
An application Moves it there Copies it there Copies it there, Copies it there, Discards it (with
replacing any replacing any a dialog box to

- A disk (Alert box tells (Alert box tells

duplicate appli-
cations in the
root folder
Copies it there,
duplicate appli-
cations in the
root folder
Copies it into
confirm the
discard)

Ejects it and
i--. you it can't you it can't replacing any a new folder, removes its
be done.) be done.) existing adding to any icon (unless it's

- contents existing
contents
the current
startup disk)

You can drag locked documents, but you can't drag anything to or
from a locked disk. See the Get Info command in "File Menu" later
in this chapter.

Finder reference 179

 Finder menus
Each application presents its commands in menus that you pull
down from the menu bar. Toge ther with dragging icons, the
Finder's menus allow you to do all your desktop management tasks.

Apple menu

r11e Edit Ll1eu.• Special _ __

About the Finder ...

Alarm Clock
Cal culator
Cho oser
Control Panel
Find File
Key Caps
Scrapbook

Figure 4-19
Apple menu

About the Finder...

This item shows the version number and the authors of the Finder,
as well as the memory size of the Macintosh you're using.

Desk accessories
Choosing a desk accessory makes that accessory appear on the
desktop. You can use the Edit menu to cut, copy, and paste the
information in most desk accessories.
The desk accessories are explained more fu lly in "Using Desk
Accessories" in Chapte r 3 and in "Desk Accessories" earlier in this
chapter.

180 Chapt er 4: Macintosh II Reference

 File menu
.~

c$ • ld1t Lliew Speuul

New Folder HN
Open HO
Print
Close

Get Info HI
Ouplicote HD
Put Away

Poge Setup
Print Catalog

Eject HE

Figure 4-20
File menu

The commands in the File menu operate on icons and windows.

New Folder
New Folder creates an empty folder that can hold documents,
applications, or other folders. New folders appear in the active
window on the desktop (as opposed to on the desktop itselO, and
you can type a name immediately after creating an empty folder. If
no directory windows are open, the New Folder command is
dimmed. See "Folders" earlier in this chapter.

Open
The Open command opens the selected icon into a window. If the
icon represents a document, opening it also starts an application
and loads the document so you can work on it. If the icon represents
an application, opening it usually gives you a new, untitled
document.
In order for you to open a document, the application that created it
must be on a currently inserted disk.
If you select a document and an application, the Finder attempts to
use that application with the document. For example, selecting
MacWrite (the word processing program) along with a text-only

Finder menus 181

 document that you created with MacTerminal (the telecommuni-
cations program) opens MacWrite to work on the text-only
document.
If you select more than one icon and choose Open, the Finder tries
to open the first icon's application to work on all the other selected
icons (assuming the application can handle more than one
document).
~l

Print (from the Finder)

The Print command prints the documents represented by the
selected icon or icons (assuming, of course, your printer is hooked
up correctly). If you select a group of icons, they'll all be printed.
The documents must always be created by the same application.
In order to print a document, you must have the application that
created it on a disk whose icon appears on the desktop. Document
printing from the Finder follows the rules and printing procedures
of that document's application.
With most applications, when you choose Print a dialog box
appears. Select the options you want, and click OK or press Return.
See each application's manual for more information on how to
print with that application. See each printer's manual for ~
I

information about using that printer.

Close
The Close command closes the active window, zooming it back
down to its icon. The icon remains selected. Of the active window is
a desk accessory, it just disappears.) The next frontmost window, if
there is one, becomes the active window.

Get Info
Get Info opens a window that displays information about whatever
the selected icon represents. The displayed information includes
o the kind of item (document, folder, or application)
o if it's a document, which application created it
o the date it was created
o the date it was last changed
o the size of it
o which disk and drive it belongs to

182 Chapter 4: Macintosh II Reference

You can add text by typing in the text box and editing it as you edit
any text
The Locked check box lets you lock a document or application (but
not a folder). When the Locked box is checked, that document or
application can't be thrown away and its name can't be changed.
You can't save any changes to a locked document.
You can still drag or open a selected icon while its information
window is open.

Duplicate
The Duplicate command duplicates the selected items on the same
disk. The duplicates are named Copy ot followed by the name of the
original.
Duplicating a folder duplicates the folder and all its contents. If you
had previously moved a document, folder, or application from the
folder to the desktop or a window, that item will not be duplicated.
(The system will assume that you meant not to include the item.)

Put Away
Put Away returns any selected documents, folders, or applications
on the desktop or in the Trash window back to the folders and disks
they belong to. This command is dimmed when no icons are
selected on the desktop or in the Trash window.

Page Setup
Page Setup lets you set up the page size, orientation, and other
options for directories that you print using the Print Catalog
command. The Page Setup command doesn't work with documents
that you print from the Finder; each document's page setup is
controlled by the Page Setup command within the application that
created it.

Print Catalog
Print Catalog prints the actual contents of the active directory
window, in whatever view you have the directory arranged. (See
11
View Menu" later in this chapter.) What you see gets
printed-icons, document names, and so on-as opposed to the
contents of documents.

Finder menus 183

 ,.,
Eject
The Eject command ejects the selected disk or the disk represented ~
by the active window. If no disk is selected, the Finder looks for an
inserted disk to eject, starting with the current startup disk.
Whenever a disk has been ejected, its icon and the icons belonging ~
to it are dimmed to show they're no longer available. Clou can also
eject a disk by dragging its icon to the Trash.)

Edit menu

ti: File

Cut 88H
Copy XC
Paste XU
Clear
Select All XA

Show Clipboard

Figure 4-21
Edit menu

-
The Finder's Edit menu allows you to edit
o the names of disks, documents, applications, or folders
o text in an information window (opened by selecting the icon and
choosing Get Info from the File menu)
o text or pictures in desk accessories
•!• Icons: You cannot use this menu to cut or copy icons. You
reproduce icons by dragging or duplicating them. See
"Dragging Icons" and "Duplicate" earlier in this chapter.
Selecting an icon also selects its title. Anything you subsequently
type replaces the old text. Clicking the selected text itself makes an
insertion point appear. You can edit this text the same way you edit
any text

184 Chapter 4: Macintosh II Reference

 Undo
This command undoes your last text-editing action in some
applications and desk accessories that use text. It may undo other
actions in some desk applications. For example, if you choose Get
Info from the file menu and type something wrong in the text box,
you can choose Undo to reverse the typing and start fresh.

Cut
Cut removes the selected material and places it on the Clipboard
(replacing the previous contents if any).

Copy
Copy puts a copy of the selected text or picture on the Clipboard
(replacing the previous contents if any). The "original" stays where
it was when you selected it.
See also "Duplicate" earlier in this chapter.

Paste
Paste puts a copy of the contents of the Clipboard at the insertion
point. You can continue to paste copies until you cut or copy a new
selection (which replaces the old contents of the Clipboard).

Clear
Clear removes the selected material without placing it on the
Clipboard. The contents of the Clipboard (if any) remain intact.

... Select All

This command selects all icons in the active window or, if no
windows are open, all icons on the desktop.

Show Clipboard
Show Clipboard displays a window with the current contents of the
Clipboard-that is, whatever you last cut or copied.

Finder menus 185

 ~
I

View menu
~
I

ci File Edit Special _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

by S all Icon
..thy Icon
by Name
by Date
by Size
by Kind

Figure 4-22
View menu

You might keep your directory windows arranged by icon most of

the time. But the commands in the View menu also let you view
directories of disks, folders, or the Trash in other arrangements.
In any text view of a disk or folder directory, small icons appear to
the left of each document, folder, or application title. Icons and
text in titles behave the same way in whatever view you choose.
Clicking either an icon or its title selects the item; the pointer then
becomes an arrow when you move it over the icon itself (in case you
want to move or copy the item, or to select something else) and an
I-beam when you move it over the item's title (in case you want to
place an insertion point for editing). Dragging an unselected icon
or title moves or copies the item-depending on where you drag it.
See "Dragging Icons'' earlier in this chapter.
The current view of the active window is marked in the View menu by
a check.

By Small Icon
By Small Icon shows the contents of the active directory window
with small icons to the left of the icon names. This view is especially
helpful when you have large numbers of documents and
applications on a disk-when looking at your hard disk, for
example.

By Icon
By Icon shows the contents of the active directory window as icons,
just as on the desktop.

186 Chapter 4: Macintosh II Reference

By Name
By Name lists the contents of the active directory window
alphabetically by name. Uppercase and lowercase are considered
equal.

By Date
By Date lists the contents of the active directory window
chronologically by modification date. The document you changed
most recently is listed first. Folders' modification dates indicate
when you created them or when you changed their contents by
adding or removing items from them.

By Size
By Size lists the applications and documents in the active directory
window by size, largest first. By Size is useful for seeing which
documents are taking the most room on the disk. Folders are listed
alphabetically by title at the bottom of the list, following the
applications and documents (but their size is not shown).

By Kind
By Kind lists the contents of the active directory window by whether
each item is a document, application, or folder. For a document, it
tells which application created it.

Special menu

a rile Edit Lliew

S•~t Sf <1rfup
ll~•~ Minit=incl<~r ...

Res tort
Shut Down

Figure 4-23
Special menu

Finder menus 187

 ,..,,
Clean Up
Clean Up is only available when you have chosen By Small Icon or
By Icon views of your directories. The command you see will
change slightly, depending on certain variables:
o If you have an active directory window with no icons selected, the
command will say Clean Up Window. If you choose it, the icons
will be arranged in neat rows and columns on an invisible grid,
filling in from left to right and top to bottom.
o If you have one or more icons selected, the cbmmand will say
Clean Up Selection. When you choose it, each selected icon will ~
I
move to the nearest available space on the grid-not necessarily
filling in from left to right and top to bottom. (To deselect all
icons, click in the gray area of the desktop.)
o If no directory windows are active and no icons are selected, the
command will say Clean Up Desktop and will move .icons on the
desktop to the nearest available space on the grid. ~
I

•!• Neater icons: If you hold down the Option key while you press
on the Special menu, the command will simply say Clean Up.
Choose it (while still holding down Option) to display the icons
in an active directory window (or the desktop if there is no
active window) neatly and compactly.

Empty Trash
Empty Trash permanently discards the contents of the Trash and
makes the space it took on the disk available for you to use
immediately. (The Finder empties the Trash automatically
whenever it needs the space, when you choose Shut Down or Restart r-i I

from this menu, or when you start an application.)

Erase Disk
Erase Disk completely erases and initializes the disk whose icon
you've selected. A dialog box will offer the usual choices about
initializing the disk.
You can't erase the current startup disk because your computer
needs information on that disk in order to work. If you want to erase
a startup disk, start your computer using a different disk.
~
\

~
!

188 Chapter 4: Macintosh II Reference I i--,I

I
- See "Initializing Disks" earlier in this chapter for more informal.ion
about initializing.

- Set Startup
Set Startup lets you jump immediately into an application when you
start the computer, without going through the Finder. You set the
startup application by selecting it in the Finder and choosing Set
Startup. The next time you start your computer using this disk, you'll
go immediately into the application.
To reset the startup to the Finder, quit the application, open the
System Folder if necessary, select the Finder icon, and choose Set
Startup again.

Use MiniFinder...
Use MiniFinder lets you isolate (and group together for quick
access) the applications a nd documents you want to use for a
particular task. Once they're in Lhe MiniFinder, you can get to them
without having to go through everything in the Finder. See "Using
the MiniFinder" in Chapter 3 for details on how to use the
Minirinder.

Restart
Restart ejects any inserted disks (fi rst saving any necessary
information), empties the Trash, and then restarts the compute r.
This is not only a shortcut but the best way to restart the Macintosh
when you need to use a different startup disk.

Shut Down
Shut Down ejects any inserted disks (first saving any necessary
information), empties the Trash, and then turns o ff the computer.

Macintosh II shortcuts
In general, shortcuts are just quicker ways to do things you can
ordinarily do some othe r way. Some shortcuts apply only to a
specific application; each application's manual explains its own.

Macintosh II shortcuts 189

 Double-click
Double-clicking an icon opens it. In text, double-clicking a word
selects the entire word.

Shift-click
Holding down the Shift key and clicking adds to an existing
selection. As long as you hold the Shift key down, the first selection
isn't deselected when you make a new selection. For example, in the .-.
Finder when you're selecting icons, you can select more than one
by holding down the Shift key while you continue clicking icons. If
you have a group of selected icons and want to deselect one of ~
them, you can use Shift-dick to deselect it. In some applications,
Apple-dick does the same thing.

Close box
Clicking the close box (in the active window's top-left comer) closes
the window. This is the same as choosing Close from the File menu.
.-r
I

Zoom box
Clicking the zoom box (in the active window's top-right comer)
expands the window to full size. Clicking the zoom box on an
expanded window returns it to its former position and size.

Enter and Return keys

Pressing the Enter or Return key in response to a dialog box is the
same as clicking the button that confirms the command or the ~
outlined button if there is one.

190 Chapter 4: Macintosh II Reference

 Tab key
Pressing the Tab key in response to a dialog box usually selects the
next place to supply information.
In the dialog boxes you see when you choose Open or S.ave As ~ithin
an application, pressing Tab is the same as clicking Drive.

Delete key
Pressing the Delete key with a selection is the same as choosing
Clear from the Edit menu. Unlike the Cut command, the Delete key
doesn't affect the Clipboard.

Apple key
You can issue many commands (including most commands in the
Edit menu) by holding down the Apple key while you press a
3C character key. Commands that have Apple-key equivalents show the
·------ key to press to the right of the command in the menu.
Holding down the Apple key while typing a period(.) sometimes
stops whatever's happening-printing a document, for example.
Holding down the Apple and Shift keys while pressing the 1 key
ejects the disk in the right-hand drive; holding them down while
pressing 2 ejects the disk in the left-hand drive.

Important If you're using an application and there are any open

documents with unsaved changes, you may lose those
changes if you eject disks this way. If you're not sure whether
there are unsaved changes, It's better to eject disks In the
normal way-clicking an Eject button, choosing Eject from the
File menu, dragging a disk icon to the Trash, or choosing Restart
or Shut Down from the Special menu.

Holding down the Apple and Shift keys while pressing 3 creates a
MacPaint document with the current contents of the screen.
(MacPaint is the original graphics program for the Macintosh series
of computers; it's available at your authorized Apple dealer.)

Macintosh II shortcuts 191

 ...... I

Holding down the Apple and Shift keys while pressing 4 prints the
current contents of the active window on an ImageWriter printer.
With the Caps Lock key down, holding down the Apple and Shift
keys while pressing 4 prints the contents of the entire screen on an
ImageWriter printer.

~
Selecting by typing I

In the directory that appears when you choose Open within an

application, any characters you type are matched character for
character to select names in the directory. If you type ab, the first
name beginning with ab (or the first name to follow alphabetically
if there are no fis) is selected. As you continue to type, additional
characters are matched. If you type br, for example, the first name
beginning with br is selected, and so on. The Delay Until Repeat
setting in the Control Panel determines how long you can pause
,...
I
between characters before the computer considers the next
character a new request. See "Using the Control Panel" in
Chapter 3.
,... i

Finder shortcuts
These shortcuts are specific to the Finder. Most of them let you do
"expert»' functions.

Option key
Holding down the Option key while you choose Close from the File
menu closes all open windows.
If your directory is in an icon view, holding down the Option key
while you choose Clean Up from the Special menu will realign the
icons in the active window to a grid pattern. ,..,I

Holding down the Option key while you double-dick a disk or folder
icon opens the icon as usual, and you can open an application or
document in the resulting window. The shortcut is that once you
return to the Finder, the window will be closed and the application
or document put away.

192 Chapter 4: Macintosh II Reference

n Apple key
Holding down the Apple key while you drag a window moves the
window without making it active.

n With your directory in an icon view, you can hold down the Apple
key while you drag and then release an icon. When you release the
icon, it will snap into alignment with the grid used by the Clean Up
command (in the Special menu).
n Holding down the Apple key while you double-dick a dimmed icon
makes that icon's window active.

n Option and Apple keys

n Holding down the Option and Apple keys while you double-click a
Finder icon makes the disk the Finder is on become the current
startup disk (if it has a system file on it).

n Miscellaneous

n Dragging a disk to the Trash is an easy way to eject the disk. If the
disk is not the current startup disk, this will also remove its icon from
the desktop.

n If you hold down the mouse button as you press the Power On key
(and continue holding it down), you'll eject any disks in both
drives. This is useful when you insert a 3. 5-inch disk before turning
on the computer, then change your mind and want it back.

n Macintosh II shortcuts 193

 Applications
No matter what kind of work you have to do, there's an Apple
Macintosh II application to help you do it.

MacWrite
With MacWrite, you create documents that look the same o n the
screen as they'll look when you print the m. Rather than working
around a lot of commands embedded in your text, w hat you see is
what you get. You use the mouse to select text and remove, copy, or
move it. You can customize your documents with many fonts and
sty les, and you can control margins or line spacing with a single
click.
•:• MacWrite version: You should use MacWrite ve rs ion 4.6 or
late r with your Macintosh JI.

s Fi le Edit Sea r ch Format Font Style

Euolulion of the Sona t a - Allegro Form

Chapter I
lnt roducti on

In this paper I wi ll di scuss the Baroque appl ica ti ons of the rftorne/loan d
the late - Baroque rftomE'//o concerto. I will then present
l ate-nineteenth - century explanations of the concert o form, discuss how
most of these theories foil under analysis, and conclude with a bri ef
discussi on of Mozert"s P1tmo Concerto in C l'linor.. K. 491, es e cul mi no ti on
of the synthesis of the ntornello pr inciple end t he developi ng
son6ta-allegro form

Defini lion of the Ritornello

Rltornello is a composi llonol device rather than a form-a way to gw e

cohesiveness to a work, not a detailed formal st ructure on which to
compose. 1 In this W6Y it resembles a fugue. In the Baroque period it
applied to short instrumen t al poss6 es plo. ed between opera scenes to Q:i

Figure 5-1
Mac Write

196 Chapter 5: Expand ing Your Macintosh II

 You can add pictures from your favorite graphics program to
documents you create with MacWrite or copy MacWrite text to a
graphics program. With your Macintosh II, words and pictures mix
beautifully.

MacPaint
MacPaint brings out the artist in everyone. \Vhether it's a technical
illustration for a research project or a sketch for a party
announcement, you can do it with MacPaint. You can use
MacPaint's drawing tools to draw perfectly structured shapes or your
own freehand designs. You can type text in distinctive fonts, sizes,
and styles and add text from other applications as well.

Edit Goodies Font FontSize Style

--- - ~ - ~------

- - - - Label Concepts ~

L t1lleling Concepts for

Sorenson's Jams and Jellies, In
2 x 3" gloss white labels
Each label to be approved by client

-
- Figure 5-2
MacPaint

- Applications 197
 Mac Terminal
MacTerminal lets you communicate with the rest of the world. You
can gain access to information services such as The Source,
CompuServe Information Services, or Dow Jones News/Retrieval;
call electronic bulletin board systems (BBS); exchange information
with other computers; and send and receive electronic mail.

File Tronsfer Settings

Settings for Pasting or Sending TeHt: File Transfer Protocol

Delay Between Chars U• I 6Dths Second @TeHt
Delay Between lines ~ 6Dths Second 0 MacBinary
[8) Word Wrap Outgoing TeHt O HModem TeH t
0 Maclerminal 1. 1
Settings for saulng lines off top : O Straight HModem
[8) Retain line Breaks
O Saue Screens Before Clearing

Figure 5-3
MacTerminal

198 Chapter 5: Expanding Your Macintosh II

Mac Project
Project manageme nt and sche duling have never bee n e asier. You
te ll MacProject what tasks are involved in your project and what
resources you have. MacProject calculates the "critical path" to
comple tion and estimates costs in money and time. If you miss (or
beat!) a deadline , or if your available resources cha nge,
MacProject recalculates everything in a flash.

S File Edit Char t Task Layout Da tes Fonts Style

0 Manufacturing Relocation

3/6 4·/. 10/87

Move t o new Reessembl e Begin
bui l ding equi pment menuf ecturi ng et
new site
3/6
Ref i l e
pepers John--You made the deadline!
Keep up the good work and
start thinking about the
Operations move.

Figure 5-4
Mac Project

Applications 199
 MacDraw
MacDraw lets you create structured graphics on your computer. You
can prepare perfect flow charts, diagrams, graphs, technical
drawings, and organizatio nal charts, as well as free hand drawings.
You can add text in different fonts, sizes, and styles.

a File Edit Style Font Layout Arrange Fill Lines Pen

-------=--::-=---
- ··-------

Figure 5-5
MacDraw

200 Chapter 5: Expanding Your Macintosh II

AppleShare
AppleShare™ workstation software lets your Macintosh II computer
communicate w ith file servers on the AppleTalk network, sharing
information, applications, and storage resources with other users.
Alternatively, AppleShare server software turns you r Macintosh II
into a powerful file server on AppleTalk, sharing its resources with
many users on the network.

Fil

Se rver Nom e: Volumes:

Soles & Merket1ng lnternelional Seles
Amencen Sales

Users:
Sue Esprnosa
Cliff Guren
John Med1ca
Leurle Sheldon
Jon Thompson
Scottie Zimmerman
<Guest>

Fn , Mey 17, 1987 3:03:53PM

Activi ty:
I I I I I I I I I I
idlt bus~

Figure 5-6
AppleShare

Applications 201
 And many more ...
Top software developers have developed many more applications
for your compucer. (Contact your authorized Apple dealer for
availability.) You can choose from
o electronic spreadsheets for budgeting, forecasting, and
answering "What if?" questions
o data base management programs for helping you keep track of
everything from inventories to prospective clients ro your
favorite restaurants
o charting programs for turning numbers nobody understands into
charts everyone understands
o programming languages, publishing programs, spelling checker
programs, and hundreds more for getting your work done (and
games or educational programs for when you need a break)

Hardware
Your Apple Macintosh II computer is a ve rsatile machine, designed
to grow as your computing needs grow. There are many devices you
can add to your computer system to expand its capabilities, and
many more are on the way.

SOOK disk drive

With an additional 800K disk drive built into your compute r, you
can work much faster and more efficiently. Copying disks becomes
a one-step operation-disk swapping is eliminaced. And you can
keep system files and applications on one disk, and all your
documents on another. See "Disks" in Chapcer 4.

202 Chapter 5: Expanding Your Macintosh II

 Figure 5-7
Second 800K disk drive

- Apple SCSI hard disks

Apple SCSI hard d isks are extremely fast information storage and
retrieval systems. You can store hundreds of applications and

- documents all in one place, letting you work much more quickly and
efficiently than with 3.5-inch disks. Hard disks fo r you r Apple
Macintosh II computer are available in 20-, 40-, and 80-megabyte
configurations, in both built-in and external models.

-
-
Internal External

Figure 5-8
SCSI hard d isks

- Hardware 203
 AppleTalk Personal Network
The AppleTalk Personal Network is a low-cost local area network
that's as easy to set up and use as your computer. AppleTalk lets
everyone in your work group communicate with each other (sending
documents or electronic mail much faster than ordinary
telecommunications). With AppleTalk, you can also share the cost
of high-performance resources such as the LaserWriter or powerful
mass-storage devices-at a fraction of the cost of other networks.
Your AppleTalk network system can grow to serve a virtually
limitless number of computers by linking separate networks
together. (Using a hardware bridge and accompanying software,
you form an interconnected series of AppleTalk zones; each
computer in the entire network can have access to any shared
resource anywhere in the network.) Whatever your networking needs
are, AppleTalk can fill them.

--1
'::::::C::::1~-- ~p

Figure 5-9
Apple Talk
-
-
204 Chapter 5: Expanding Your Macintosh II
 Apple lmageWriter II printer
With an Apple ImageWriter II printer attached to your computer,

-
you can get high-quality printed copies at a low cost. And with the
AppleTalk option (requiring the AppleTalk card), you can connect
a number of computers to the printer.

- Figure 5- 10
lmageWrlter II

Apple LaserWriter printer

- The Apple LaserWriter printer gives you near-typeset-quality

printed copies of your work, for a lot less money than you'd expect.
And LaserWriter printers use the AppleTalk Personal Network so you
can share them with the people you work with.

Figure 5 - 11
LaserWrlter

-
-
Hardware 205
 Apple Personal Modem
An Apple Personal Modem lets your computer communicate with
the rest of the world using telephone lines. You can send and
receive messages through electronic mail, subscribe to news
services, find out the latest price of your stocks, or gain access to an
e ntire university library from your computer. Your Apple dealer
can tell you about the Macintosh telecommunications possibilities,
including MacTerminal.

Figure 5-12
Apple Personal Modem

Monitors and video cards

You can choose a monochrome or color monitor for your
Macintosh II system:
o 12-inch Apple High-Resolution Monochrome Monitor
o 13-inch AppleColor™ High-Resolution RGB Monitor
The 12-inch monitor, with a density of 76 dots per inch, lets you see
more than half a page high and a full page wide. It's perfect for word
processing and most business applications.
The 13-inch monitor has a density of 69 dots per inch with full RGB
(red/green/blue) color. Use it for any application where color is a ,....
plus.

206 Chapter 5: Expanding Your Macintosh II

 - --- ---
The standard video card will drive either of these monitors and
allow either 16 colors or 16 shades of gray.
With the video card expansion kit, you can select colors from a
palette of millions and display up to 256 colors. See your Apple
dealer for details.

- Figure 5-13
Monitors

- Memory expansion
Your compute r comes with 1 megabyte (1 MB) of memory on the
main logic board. You can upgrade your system to 2, 4, 5, or 8
megabytes of memory, letting you work faster, more efficiently, and

-
with far larger documents. Because there's no system overhead
associated with added memory, you can more than double your
computer's working space. And with Apple Computer's new Single
In-line Memory Module (SIMM), it takes your dealer just a few
minutes to give you all the memory you need for the most
dema nding applications .

.1•··~

-
-
Hardware 207
 Apple Extended Keyboard
The Apple Extended Keyboard was designed with additional keys to
allow you to run alternate applications and operating systems such
as MS/DOS and UNIX. See the manuals that came with these
programs to learn how to take advantage of the additional keys.

Figure 5-1 4
Apple Extended Keyboard

Macintosh Programmer's Workshop (MPW)

If you're interested in developing applications for the Macintosh II,
ask your authorized Apple dealer about the Macintosh
Programmer's Workshop. MPW is a programming environment for
the Macintosh that includes an assembler and C and Pascal
compilers. Version 2.0 supports the Macintosh JI.
If you plan to develop applications for sale through retail channels,
you can get valuable support from Apple Developer Relations.
Write to
Apple Developer Services
Mailstop 27-W
Apple Computer, Inc.
20525 Mariani Avenue
Cupertino, CA 95014

208 Chapter 5: Expanding Your Macintosh II

 The first thing to know: You'll never damage your Macintosh II
computer by clicking in the wrong place or pressing the wrong key.
Your computer is no more fragile than a television set. And if you
follow the few suggestions here, you and your computer will be
together for a long time.

The main unit

Give your computer plenty of space-enough so air can circulate on
all sides, even the bottom. Make sure air can circulate around each
of the ventilation slots on the top and sides of the main unit. The
vents on the sides of the main unit are exhaust vents (where heat
escapes), and the vent on the top is an air intake (allowing cool air
in). Don't use the main unit on thick-pile carpet or upholstery, or
anything else that will block its ventilation.
Be careful not to spill liquids on your computer. It p robably won't
survive a cup of coffee spilled into it.
The computer can tolerate about the same range of temperatures as
you can, but don't let it sit outside in direct sunlight or expose it to
rain (much less hail, sleet, or snow). The main unit may feel warm
to the touch after it's been on for a while. This is just the heat
generated inside escaping.

Important Proper ventilation is Important to the life of the computer. Be

sure to leave a 4- to 6-lnch clearance between the side vents
on the main unit and any object that might restrict air flow.
Always keep your computer's main unit flat. sitting on its rubber
feet. Standing It on edge defeats the cooling design. and Is
likely to make your computer overheat. This will eventually
damage the main unit. (See Figure 6-1 .)

212 Chapter 6: Taking Care of Your Macintosh II

 Right way
Figure 6 - 1
How to place the main unit

- If you choose to leave your computer o n all the time, re me mber to

turn down the brightness o r contrast whe n you're not using it; if your
computer is le ft o n for long periods (days or weeks), the image on
the screen w ill start to "burn in," and the screen may be
permanently damaged.

Extend hard disk life If your c omputer has a hard disk and you p lan to be away from
it for eight hours or more , shut off your entire computer syste m
to extend the hard disk's life. While the c omputer part of your
system can stay on indefinitely, the disk d rive will eventually
wear out.

The monitor

-
There a re a number of ven tilation slots on the top of the monicor.
These vents allow heat co escape, so be sure to leave chem
unobstrucced . Don 't set anything-even a piece of paper-on the
top of the d isplay monitor.

The m onitor 213

 The keyboard
Try not to spill anything on the keyboard. It can be ruined by a
spilled soft drink or anything that leaves a sticky residue. If you spill
something on the keyboard and it stops working:
o If the liquid is sweet or sticky, unplug the keyboard and take it to
your authorized Apple deale r for repair or replacement
o If the liquid is thin and clear, try unplugging the keyboard,
turning it upside down to let the liquid drain out, and drying it for
24 hours at room temperature. If it still doesn't work, take it to
-
your Apple dealer.

The mouse
Be careful not to drop the mouse or let it hang from a table by its
cable. Just use common sense in treating it as carefully as you can.
The surface your mouse moves on s hould be as smooth, clean, and
dust-free as possible.
Clean the mouse once a month to kee p it running efficiently:

1. Turn the mouse upside down, and rotate the black plastic
dial counterclockwise as far as It will go.

2. Holding one hand over the ball and dial to catch them, turn
the mouse right side up. (See Figure 6-2.)

The dial and the ball will drop into your hand. fi

214 Chapter 6: Taking Care o f Your Macintosh Ii

Figure 6-2
Disassembling the mo use

3. Inside the case are two plastic rollers, similar to those on a

tape recorder. Using a cotton swab moistened with alcohol
or tape head cleaner, gently wipe off any oil or dust that has
collected on the rollers, rotating them to reach all surfaces.
(See Figure 6-3.)

4. Wipe the ball with a soft, clean, dry cloth.

Don't use tissue or anything that may leave lin t, and don't use a
cleaning liquid.

Figure 6-3
Cleaning the mouse

The m ouse 215

 5. Blow gently Into the case to remove any dust that has
collected there, or use a low-powered vacuum cleaner.

Portable car vacuums are ideal.

6. Put the ball back Into its case, and lining up the Indicator on
the dial with the O on the back of the case, reinsert the dial
and turn it clockwise as far as it will go.

It will dick when firmly in place.

n
Disks
l 25°F (52°C) Although Apple 3.5-inch disks are pretty rugged, they do have a few
modest physical requirements-about the same as aud io cassette
I.. tapes have. Your disks should be ke p t dry, away from extreme
temperatures (don't lay them on top of your compute r or store
them on the seat of your car), out of direct sunlight, and out of
' [Qll reach of anything that contains a magnet, such as a te lephone.
50°F (10°C) (Magnetic fields can scramble the information on the disk.)
Whe n the disk is inserted into the disk drive, the metal covering on
the disk case slides out of the way so the compute r can get
information from and save information onto the disk. Whe n the
disk is out of the disk drive, the metal covering d oses by s pring
action to protect the disk unde rneath ic. Never touch the exposed
disk under the metal covering.
Other than that, you don 't have to treat disks especially carefu lly.
You can carry them around in your b riefcase or coat pocket or mail
the m to your aunt in Cooperstown. (Two fit nicely in a business
e nvelope.)
Be sure to make a copy of any disks you can't do without. (See
"Copying an Entire Disk" in Chapter 3.) It's no fun losing a report
the night before you were going to make final corrections.
You can purchase disks in a 10-pack from your authorized Apple
deale r.

2 16 Chapter 6: Taking Care of Your Ma cintosh II

 The clock battery

- Your computer has a clock that runs continuously, even when the
computer is switched off. (Choose Alarm Clock from the Apple
menu to see it.) When the computer is off, the clock runs on battery
power. There are two batteries, and they will probably last about
e ight years. If the computer system fails to start or the dock begins
to lose accuracy, see your deale r for a replaceme nt.

Service and support

To help you get the best performance from your computer system,
Apple Computer has established a worldwide network of full-
support Apple dealers. If you need answers lo technical questions or
information about product updates, your Apple dealer can help
you. Apple's Technical Support organization backs each deale rship
to e nsure prompt and reliable assistance.
If service is required on your compute r, take it to your authorized
Apple dealer. Each authorized Apple dealer is re quired to employ
Apple-trained service technicians and to use Apple parts in
performing repairs. If you have moved, take your computer to the
nearest authorized Apple dealer. The re are more than 3,000
authorized Apple dealers in the United States alone. For the
authorized Apple deale r nearest you in the United States, call (800)
538-9696; in Canada, (800) 268-7682. Or, if you prefer, write to

- Apple Compute r, Inc.

Attn: Custome r Relations
20525 Mariani Avenue
Cupertino CA 950I4
Apple also offers the Apple Care® Service Agreement, which keeps

- your warranty protection in force for up to three years. Apple Care is

one o f the lowest priced service plans in the industry, and your
Apple Care agreement w ill be honored at all participating
,.... authorized Apple dealers w ithin the country of purchase-an added
benefit if you re locate. Local service means time saved in getting
your Apple system back to work.

Service and suppo rt 217

 You may purchase AppleCare at any time, but for uninterrupted
protection, it's a good idea to buy the Apple Care along with your
computer system (or within 90 days of the date you purchase your
system). In addition to providing you with complete coverage,
Apple Care purchased along with your computer avoids an owner-
paid inspection of your system if your warranty has expired.
Apple Care is available through your authorized Apple deale r.

If something goes wrong

If your computer stops working, try the suggestions in Table 6-1; if it
still doesn't work, take it to you r authorized Apple dealer. See
"Troubleshooting Your SCSI Hard Disk" in Appendix A for help
with hard disk problems.

Warn ing Any time you detect a serious problem wit h the o peration of
your computer, unplug the power cord. This is the easiest way
to turn off the power in an emergency. Contact your
authorized Apple dealer to diagnose and correct p roblems.

Table 6-1
Troubleshooting

Symptom What's probably wrong What to do

The screen is dark. The monitor or computer Check the brightness and contrast
isn't getting power, or controls on the monitor; adjust them to
the brightness or contrast make the screen brighter. Make sure the .~
controls are turned' way down. computer is turned on and the power
cord is firmly attached to b oth the
main unit and the wall outlet. If the outlet
is controlled by a wall switch, see that the
switch is on. If the outlet is controlled by a
dimmer switch, use a different outlet.
(See your monitor's manual.)

218 Chapter 6: Taking Care of Your Macintosh II

 Symptom What's probably wrong What to do

\\/'hen you insert a When you start up the The question mark means
disk, the screen is computer or insert a disk, the compute r is switched
b right, b ut the the co mputer presents one on and ready fo r you to
desk top doesn 't of several icons that give insert a startup disk.
a ppear. you information about
itself or the disk you inserted . The "happy Macintosh"
Each icon gives you information me ans e verything's fine
about p ossible proble ms. to this point.

An Xusually means the disk

you inserted to start up the
IllX1J1·-..
compute r isn't a startup d isk. 11
It can also mean the disk
is damaged. Use the power
switch on the back of the
main unit to sw itch off the
computer and try restarting

- with a differe nt disk.

The "sad Macintosh"

appe ars whe n the compute r
can't go any fu rthe r because
of a prob le m with the
system software. Sometimes
this indicates a hardware
proble m. See you r deale r.
You may have to eject the
disk manually and unplug
the system.
A dialog box w ith a There's a serious proble m with 'lhe e rror codes presented in the dialog box
bomb icon appears. the softwa re. are very te chnical and, unless you're an
expert, won't mean much. Try clicking
the Restart button in the dialog box
(restarting the compute r with the same
disk). If the p roble m occurs again, abando n
that disk and try a different copy of the
software.

If something goes wrong 219

Symptom What's probably wrong What to do

Moving the mouse The mouse might not be firmly Is the mouse firmly connected to the
has no effect on the connected. If the mouse is computer? Is it moving on a smooth, clean
pointer. connected to the keyboard, make surface? Does the mouse need cleaning?
sure the keyboard itself is (See "The Mouse" earlier in this chapter
plugged in. If the connections are
good, the mouse may not be
working properly.
for instructions.) If the problem doesn't
seem to be with the mouse, check the
software by first restarting the computer,
... I

then trying another disk. If there seems to

be a software problem you can't solve by
restarting or by trying another disk, tell your
Apple dealer about it.
Typing on the You might be in a situation that Make sure you're in a situation that allows
keyboard produces doesn't allow typing. (For typing. Use the Key Caps desk accessory
nothing on the example, while in MacPaint you to check each key. Make sure the
screen. have to select the tool for entering keyboard is connected securely. Open an ....,
I
text, or typing won't work.) The information window and try typing there. If
keyboard connection might be this doesn't help, see your Apple dealer.
loose, or the keyboard broken.
You can't save There are several conditions that Usually a message appears in a box
anything on a disk. might cause this problem: describing the exact problem. If not, take
o The disk is not formatted. the following steps: Eject the disk and see
o The disk is full. if the plastic tab is in the locked position.
o The disk is locked. Of you can't eject it in the usual way, see the
~
o The disk drive isn't working. next part of this table.) Reinsert the disk. I

Check to see if there's room for more

information on the disk by selecting the disk
and choosing Get Info from the Finder's
File menu. Try using a different disk.
If you still have trouble saving anything,
the disk drive probably isn't working
correctly. Take the computer to your
Apple dealer for help.

220 Chapter 6: Taking Care of Your Macintosh II

 Symptom What's probably wrong What to do

You can't eject Your computer can't get the Choose Shut Down from the Special menu.
the disk. information it needs to eject the Then hold down the mouse button while you
disk in the usual way. press the Power On key. This should eject
the disk. If not, find the small hole to the
right of the disk drive. Insert a
straightened paper clip or similar small
object and push. This ejects the disk
if all else fails.
The computer shuts The air vents on the sides and top Check the clearance around the air
down without warning. of the main unit may have been vents, and remove anything blocking the
blocked or covered in some way, flow of air to the ventilation system. Also
-~ causing the system to overheat. check the ambient temperature. Give the
(Or the room temperature may computer time to cool down (at least half
have been too high.) Thermal an hour), and try starting it again.
protection circuitry may have
shut down the computer to prevent
damage to the hardware.
The fan seems to be If the computer is heating up, Check the clearance around the air
noisier than usual. the fan will work harder. vents, and remove anything blocking
the flow of air to the ventilation system.
Also check the ambient temperature and
do what you can to cool the room you're
working in. If it is not possible to lower
the temperature, turn off the computer.

--.
.

General symptoms and cures

If none of these specific symptoms or cures seem to fit, consider the
three general ways in which your computer could be ailing:
o The application you're using could have failed to run properly
just this once after it was copied from the disk into memory.
o The disk you're using has damaged files on it.
o The computer is on the blink.

If something goes wrong 221

 If you've checked the specific symptoms in this chapter and you still
can't get any response from your computer, try turning it off briefly '\
and then on again. If this works and this time you're able to
complete what you tried before, it was just a glitch. (That's a
technical term.) If you find yourself in the same dilemma after -,
restarting the computer, the problem is with the disk (possibly your
hard disk if it's the current startup disk). Try another disk (one
without any valuable documents on it, so you don't risk losing
them).

Miscellaneous software problems

You can avoid many software problems by always keeping each of ~
I

your startup disks current with the latest system software. See "Using
the Installer" in Chapter 3. If you have the same problem with all
disks, the computer most likely has a problem. Take it to your Apple ·~
\

dealer.
Some applications might require their own customized system files
to work properly. In this case, hold down the Option key while you
double-click the application to force the computer to switch to
another startup disk. This is especially useful if you're using a hard ~ !
disk. See "Startup Disks" in Chapter 4.
Some applications use data files (such as help files) that must be kept
together in one folder. If you drag that folder from a one-sided disk
to a disk that's initialized two-sided or a hard disk, the application
may not be able to find the data files. Try moving the data files to
the same folder as the application. ._,
\

222 Chapter 6: Taking Care of Your Macintosh II

 -

•
•
n
-
- ____
~,..._ ::_-
 Appendixes

----
-..

L / - - -- - - -

~-
 Appendix A

Working With Hard Disks 1

A hard disk lets you work more quickly and more efficiently. You
work more quickly w ith a hard disk because it transfers information n
to and from your computer's main memory faster than a 3.5-inch
disk does; you don't have to wait for your disks to catch up with you
when you store or retrieve information. You work more efficiently
with a hard disk because you can store large amounts of information
on it- from 25 to 100 times as much as you can store on a 3.5-inch
disk, depending on your hard disk's capacity.
You work with a hard disk and a 3.5-inch disk in the same way; how
you open a disk, copy programs and data, and organize
information in folders is identical. In fact, the only real difference
is that you can't eject a hard disk. You can think of a hard disk as an
oversized disk that always stays in its drive. (See "Getting the Most
Out of Your Hard Disk" later in this appendix.)
To prepare your hard disk, you need to initialize it. Then, to make it
a startup disk (so that starting your system is automatic), you need to
install the system software.
•!• External hard disk users: Setting up an external hard disk is
nearly the same as setting up an internal hard disk. The only
differences are that, with an external hard disk, you need to
n
attach the hard disk to the computer and you need to p lug the
hard disk into a power source. See the manual that came with i"l
your external hard disk for details.

226
 Using the hard disk installer
The hard disk Installer Is You use the hard disk installer to initialize your hard disk, update
identified b y the Apple HD your disk when you get new hard disk resources, and do regular
SC Setup Ic on In the
Utilities Folder. maintena nce testing.

- Initializing your hard disk

Initializing a hard disk prepares the disk to store information and
installs a file called Driver Resource, which contains a program that
tells your compute r how to work with the disk.

Important Someone may have alread y prepared your hard disk for you. If
that' s the c a se, yo u pro bably won ' t want to Initialize the hard
disk again; reinitia lizing a disk wipes out any information already
stored on It.

-
To see If your ha rd disk has already been p repared, choose
Restart fro m the Special m e nu. (If you have an external hard
disk, switc h It on and wait about 10 seconds b efo re choosing
Restart.) A ny 3.5-inc h disks will be ejected from the disk drives.
a nd your computer will reset itself and then t ry to restart.
If the hard d isk is a lready p repared, In a few seconds you' ll see
t he Macintosh II Finder. You can skip to "Getting the Most Out

- of Your Ha rd Disk:
If you see a quest ion mark on the d isplay for more than a

-
second o r two, you need to p repare the hard disk. Read on.

Here's how to initialize your hard disk:

1. Shut the computer off using Shut Down from the Special
menu.

- 2. Insert the System Tools disk into the right-hand drive.

3. Restart the c ompute r by pressing th e Power On k ey ct the

top of the keyboard.

4. Select the System Tools icon, and open it by choosing

Open from the File menu or double-clicking the ic on.

5. Select the Utilities Folder Icon, and open it by c hoosing

Open from the File menu or double-clicking the icon.

Using the hard d isk installer 227

 Among other icons, you see the Installe r and Apple HD SC
Setup .

• file Edit U1ew Special

.; 1tems
System To ols
537Y m d1S' 24.:~ ava1lablt
,.leml
[J
~ Stist-:-rr. Folde-t· mmL
o
Update h•ldt>r T~a
~
hTe t

:o Utilities Folder E!l:

3 it•ms 537K in disk 242K available

JQl
~
c=J
Apple HD SC Setup
~
lnstallor
LJ
lnstallor Script s

IQj
!QT 101 121
Figure A-1
Utilities Folder

6. Select the Apple HD SC Setup icon, and open It by

choosing Open from the File menu or double -clicking the
Icon.
The Apple HD SC Setup dialog box appears:

Apple HO SC Setup uI. I

( Initialize )
SCS I Oeuice: O
Update
Oriue
Test
Quit

Figure A-2
Apple HD SC Setup d ialog box

228 Appendix A: Working With Hard Disks

 •!• Multiple hard disk users: If you're setting up an external hard
disk and you have at least one other external SCSI hard disk,
make sure that the device priority number in the dialog box
matches the priority switch number that appears on the back of

- your hard disk. The internal hard disk (if you have one) is
priority number 0. See "Drive" in the next section for more
information.

7. Click Initialize.
Another dialog box comes up, giving you a chance to change
your mind; it warns you that the initialization process erases
the whole disk.

8. Click OK to start the process.

As the hard disk begins operating, various messages appear on
the display, explaining what's going on in the meantime. The
initialization process will take about 10 minutes for a
20-megabyte drive.

9. Name the disk.

When initialization is over, a dialog box comes up, asking you
to give your hard disk a name. The name can have up to 27
characters, including spaces. You can use any character except
the colon (:).

10. Click Quit.

Using the hard disk installer 229

/
 You return to the Finder, and you see the Hard Disk icon on the
right side of the desktop with the name you've given it.

• f 1le Edit l11ew ~peCJal

~~
!
~ys tern Tools
4 •tms ~·37~ ... ~is' :'4.'.) .h•-i1ht-lie·

-
f

·,J
LJ
t .. n r· ldtf 11hhu r 1dt·
e!!mD
1-=--i '
.. 1.~;;-1
- . t

..o Utilities Folder 0

1--- 3 items 537Kin disk 24 2K av ail ab le

IQ1
lie:.
C=:J
Apple HD SC Setup
~
Installer
LJ
lnsta1lation Scripts

IQJ
IQl
:::::
J2 '2J

Figure A-3
Hard Disk Icon on the d esktop

Other hard disk installer functions

The dialog box in Figure A-2 has four other buttons besides
Initialize. You already know about the Quit button; the other
three-Update, Test, and Drive- let you perform maintenance
functions on your hard disk.

Update
Click the Update button to install an updated resource on the hard
disk. (From time to time, Apple Computer releases improved
versions of software; your authorized Apple dealer can tell you whe n
an updated resource becomes available.) Updating your hard disk
software lets you get improved performance without any risk to the
information a lready store d.

230 Appendix A: Working With Hard Disks

 You also use this function to reinstall the resource if you have
certain kinds of problems with the hard disk. See "Troubleshooting
Your SCSI Hard Disk" later in this appendix.

Test
Click the Test button to start a test of your hard disk. The test takes
about 4 minutes (for a 20-megabyte drive) and checks to make sure
your hardware is working properly. (It doesn't check any software,
and it has no effect on information you've stored on the disk.)
You can run the test any time you wanL In fact, it makes sense to run
this test once a month or so to make sure that everything is working
OK. (Sometimes this test can spot a problem before it becomes
obvious, and before any of your data is affected.)
If your hard disk fails the test, immediately copy any files you
haven't backed up yet. Then try to reinitialize and retest your hard
disk. If it fails the test again, run Disk First Aid. (You'll find

-
instructions for runnning this application in the Mactntosh System
Uttltttes User's Gutde.) If it still fails, stop using the hard disk and
contact your authorized Apple dealer. (If the dealer has to work on
the disk, all your files will be erased in the process.)

Drive
Click the Drive button when you want the Macintosh II to search for
the next available disk drive. In other words, this button serves the
same purpose as the Drive button on directory dialog boxes you see
frequently.
•!• If you have a non-Apple SCSI disk drive: The Drive function
will not include any non-Apple SCSI disk drives in the search.
The updates to system software you will be installing cannot be
guaranteed to work on all third-party hardware.
When you click Drive in this dialog box, the system will tell you the
device priority number for each device it finds. This is simply for
your information; you cannot change the device priority from this
dialog box.

Using the hard disk Installer 231

 Installing system software
Making your hard disk a startup disk lets you start your computer
without putting a 3.5-inch disk into the drive. You can make your
hard disk a startup disk by installing system software on it.

-
To install system software on you r hard disk, you have a choice of
two procedures:
o With the computer turned off, inse rt the System Tools disk into a
3.5-inch drive. Then press the Power On key. Open the System
Tools disk icon and then open the Installe r icon (in the Utilities
Folder), and bri ng up the Installer dialog box. Select Macintosh
II Installation and click Install. The advantage of this p rocedure is
that the installation w ill include only the resources re qu ired for
your Macintosh II.
o Drag the System Folder from the System Tools disk to the hard
disk.
If you're using more than one external hard disk with a System file,
be sure to set the proper startup device in the Control Panel. See
"Using the Control Panel" in Chapter 3.

McH1nto\ll lnst1llat1ontvl.ll
ln\t<1lle1
Hi111l lll\k n
"1.iuntosh Sl ln\loll<1t1on W·l.11
Macintosh II Installation h.14.1) · ·
llr ll'P
Applefolk lrn11geu111te1 ft•2.5l
lrnayrlJl11te1 llll.51
ldH'IUilltl'I 111), II

[_
llelp

n
n l'leose \elect the ll'\OIJICe\ HHI the r11\k you U•dnl to
..LJ 111stt1ll them on.

Figure A-4
Installer dialog box

232 Appendix A: Working With Hard Disks

 Getting the most out of your hard disk
While you can approach using your hard disk as though it were a

- 3.5-inch disk, there are certain precautions you s hould cake:

• Organize your files carefully.

Hard disks lee you keep large numbers of applications,

documents, and other files a mouse-dick away. Without careful
organizing, you can scatter your files all over the place. Be sure
to organize your files into folders in a way that makes your job
easiest. And if you happen to misfile a document or application
in the wrong place, use the Find File desk accessory to help you
locate it. (See "Using Find File" in Chapter 3.)

• Always choose Shut Down (from the Special menu in the

Finder) to tum off your computer.
When you choose Shut Down, the computer is able to put

-
everything away safely before it turns itself off.
Turning off the computer by anothe r means (such as pushing the
power switch) while the hard disk is working can cause the disk to

-
lose information. Sometimes it can damage the disk directory. If
this happens, try using the Disk First Aid program. If that doesn't
he lp, you'll have to reinitialize the hard disk-and in the process

- •
lose all the information on the disk.

Back up everything.

- Some people back up information stored on their hard disks

weekly; more prudent people back up their work on a daily basis.
The important thing is to make backup copies regularly. Hard

- disks are reliable, but accidents do happen. Copy individual

docume nts from the hard disk to a 3.5-inch disk manually. Use
the Hard Disk Backup program described in the Macintosh
System Utilities User's Guide to back up large groups of
documents.

-
• Shut off your hard disk when you're not using it.

Mechanical things tend to wear out faster than e lectronic things.

Your hard disk contains mechanical devices that are always in
motion. While your hard disk has been designed to give you
thousands of hours of trouble-free use, you can extend its life

-
- Getting the Most out of Your Hard Disk 233
 conside rably if you shut it down whe n you're through using it for
the day (that is, if you expect to be away from it for e ight hours
or so).
Your hard disk is part of an integrated computer system (even if
your disk is an external one), so s hut down the whole system
rather than just the hard disk. (Of course, if you have an internal
hard disk, you must shu t off the main unit to shut off the hard
disk.) You needn't bothe r shutting off the system if you'll be using
it again within a few hours.

-
Terminators are sandwich-
like devices that fit
between a SCSI cable and
Adding SCSI terminators
Hard disks and othe r devices connected to the SCSI port on the back
of the main unit must have the prope r number of terminators fo r
-
a SCSI device. or between the devices to work correclly and to prevent damage to the SCSI
two SCSI connectors. chip inside your computer.
There must b e no m ore
than two terminators In a Whether o r not you need (or don't need) a terminator can be
SCSI c hain: one at the confusing. Sometimes there is a terminato r inside a SCSI device
start of the chain. and on e
at the end . w he re you can't see it, as with an Apple internal hard disk. (A
device's documentation w ill tell you if it has a terminator.) And
sometimes the 18-inch cable that you need to connect external
devices to the SCSI connector acts as a terminator. Find the
situation that applies to you in the following list. In all cases, it's
assumed that you're using Apple's 18-inch SCSI cable to go from
you r compute r to the first SCSI device.
o Internal hard disk to a single external Apple device. Add a
te rminator between the SCSI cable and the SCSI connector o n the
external Apple device.

I-
- - -· t----11
J g
-
Figure A -5
Connecting an Ap p le device to a hard disk

234 A p pendix A: Working With Hard Disks

 o Internal hard disk to multiple external Apple devices. Add a
Lerminator between the SCSI cable and the SCSI connector on Lhe
last device in the chain.

Figure A-6
Connecting multiple Apple devices to a hard disk

o No internal hard disk to a single external Apple device. Add a

terminator between Lhe SCSI cable and the SCSI connector o n Lhe

,- ,
external Apple device.

- '--- - - - -·
1---ll
Figure A-7
Connecting an Apple device to a
Macintosh II without a hard disk

o No internal hard disk to multiple external Apple devices. Add a

- termi.n ator between the SCSI cable and the SCSI connector on Lhe
first external Apple device in the chain; then add a lerminato r
betwee n the SCSI cable and Lhe SCSI connector o n Lhe last device

- in the chain.

- I~=-
~ L~_
~ ,
- - _

Figure A-8
, '
I - - -

- Connecting multiple Apple devices to a Macintosh II

without a hard disk

-
Adding SCSI Terminators 235
 1
o Internal hard disk to a single external non-Apple device. If the
external device does not have a built-in terminator, add a
terminator between the SCSI cable and the external device's SCSI
connector. If the device has a built-in terminator, you don't
need to add one.

·-, ~_
(i .
-
Figure A-9
Connecting a non-Apple device to a hard disk
1
o Internal hard disk to multiple external non-Apple devices. If
none of the devices has a built-in terminator, add a terminator
between the SCSI cable and the SCSI connector on the last device
in the chain. If one of the devices in the chain has a built-in
terminator, place that device at the end of the chain and don't
add any terminators.

I I I I
-
q----_j.__~_o_
11

I
Figure A-10
Connec ting multiple non-Apple devices to a hard disk

-
236 Appendix A: Working With Hard Disks
 o No internal hard disk to a single external non-Apple device. If
the external device does not have a built-in terminator, add a
terminator between the SCSI cable and the external device's SCSI

- connector. If the device has a built-in terminator, you don't

need to add one.

l lI
I I_.__ _

-
- Figure A- 11
Connecting a non-Apple device to a
Macintosh II without a hard disk

o No internal hard disk to multiple external non-Apple devices. If

none of the devices has a built-in terminator, add a terminator

- between the SCSI cable and the first non-Apple SCSI device in the
chain. Then add a terminator between the last cable and the SCSI
connector on the last device in the chain. If one of the devices in
the chain has a built-in terminator, place that device at the end
of the chain and e liminate the second terminator.

----

I 11 I
- I I H _
l
I
lI I~ LJ D

Figure A- 12
Connecting multiple non-Apple devices to a Macintosh II
without a hard disk

- Adding SCSI Terminators 237

 1
Warn ing You can have no m ore than two terminato rs In the entire SCSI
chain . More than two te rminators In the c hain may damage ,...,
yo ur computer. If more than one of the non-Apple devic e s in
the c hain has a built-In terminator, remove that terminat o r or
have your Apple dealer remov e It. Check the manual tha t
c ame with the devic e to be sure.

Troubleshooting your hard disk

From time to time, you might expe rie nce some problems with you r
hard disk. Here are some common symptoms and what to do about
them. For more symptoms and cures associated w ith an external
hard disk, see the manual that came with your disk.

• The Hard Disk icon doesn't appear on the Finder desktop.

o Your hard disk might not be initialized.
o All exte rnal hard disks must be turne d on and running fo r at
least 10 seconds before your computer is switche d on.
o The hard disk resource might be damaged . To find out:
1. Insert the System Tools disk.
2. Run the Apple HD SC Setu p application.
3. Click Update.
4. Whe n the setup is comple te, click Quit.
If the resource was the problem, the Ha rd Disk icon should
appe ar on the desktop.
o If the ha rd d isk you 're having trouble w ith is a startup disk, the
Syste m file on the hard disk might be da maged. To find out:
-
1. Choose Shut Down from the File me nu.
2. Insert the System Tools disk.
3. Restart the comp ute r.
4. Open the System Folder on the System Tools disk.
5. Drag the System file from the System Tools disk to the
System Folde r on the hard disk, re placing the potentially
damaged file. (You may lose some fonts and desk
accessories, but you can recopy the m easily using Font/DA
Move r.)

n
238 Ap p e nd ix A : Wo rking With Ha rd Disks
 6. Eject the System Tools disk by choosing Eject from the File
menu.
7. Choose Restart from the Special menu.
If the System file was the problem, the Hard Disk icon should
appear on the desktop. However, this procedure can cause
you to lose some fonts and desk accessories that were in your
original System file.
o You might have lost power while the hard disk was in use. If so,
try using the Disk First Aid program to recover. As a last
resort, contact your authorized Apple dealer.

• An application In a folder won't open.

Move the program out of the folder onto the desktop and try
again.

• When you select the Apple HD SC Setup icon, you see the
message "Drive selection failed. n
An external hard disk isn't connected properly or it isn't switched
on. See "Getting the Most Out of Your Hard Disk" earlier in this
appendix for information about connecting SCSI devices. Make
sure that terminators and cables are seated properly.

Troubleshooting your hard disk 239

 Appendix B

Macintosh II Specifications

Processor MC68020, 32-bit architecture, 15.6672 MHz

clock frequency
RAM memory 1 MB, expandable to 8 MB on board;
expandable to 2 GB in NuBus slots
ROM memory 256K (standard)
Coprocessor
Memory
management
68881 floating-point device (IEEE standards)

Software, optional 68851 PMMU (Paged

-
Memory Management Unit)
3.5-inch disk SOOK per formatted double-sided disk, hard-
she ll media (second unit optional)
Hard disk Options include 20 MB, 40 MB, and 80 MB
SCSI hard disks, internal and/or external
Monitors Options include 12-inch, 640-by-480-pixel
monochrome; 13-inch, 640-by-480-pixel
RGB
Interfaces Two 8-pin mini-circular serial (RS-422) ports,
one DB-25 SCSI port, two Apple DeskTop Bus
(ADB) ports, six NuBus internal slots
supporting full 32-bit address and data lines

240
,....
Sound generator Apple custom sound chip (ASC) including
,... 4-voice wave-table synthesis and stereo
sampling generator capable of driving stereo
mini-phone jack headphones or stereo
equipment
~
Input voltage 90 to 140 VAC and 170 to 270 VAC, auto-
matically configured
~ Frequency 48to62 Hz
Max power 230 watts, not including monitor power
Mouse Mechanical tracking, optical shaft encoding
3. 54 pulse per mm (90 pulse per in) of
travel
Operating
temperature 10° C to 35° C (50° F to 95° F.>
Storage
temperature -40° C to 47° C (-40° F to 116.6° F.>

.... Relative humidity

Altitude
5% to 95% (noncondensing)
0 to 3048 m CO to 10,000 ft)

,..,
Weight Height Width Depth

-.. Main unit

Apple Keyboard
10.9 to 11.8 kg
(24 to 26 lb)
1.0 kg
(2 lb 4 oz)
140mm
(5.51 in)
44.5 mm
(1.75 in)
474mm
(18.66 in)
418.3 mm
(16.S in)
365mm
(14.37 in)
142mm
(5.6 in)
Mouse .17kg 27.9 mm 53.3 mm 96.5 mm
.... Apple Extended
(6 oz)
1.6 kg
(1.1 in)
56.4 mm
(2.1 in)
486mm
(3.8 in)
188mm

... Keyboard (optional)

Apple High-Resolution
(3 Ib 10 oz)
7.7kg
(2.25 in)
255mm
(19.125 in)
310mm
(7.4 in)
373mm

-
Monochrome Monitor (17 lb) (10.04 in) (12.2 in) (14.68 in)
Apple High-Resolution 15.45 kg 281 mm 344mm 402mm
RGB Monitor (34 lb) (11.06 in) 03.54 in) (15.83 in)

fmlllll

Appendix B: Macintosh II Specifications 241

 Appendix C

Expansion Cards and

Power Requirements

There are limits to the amount of electrical power available for the
six expansion slots in the main unit of your Macintosh II. Under
most circumstances, this should not create a problem . H owever, if
you plan to install several cards, it is a good idea for you to take time
to assess the power requirements for the combined ca rds. Installing
a group of cards that make excessive demands on avail able power -
may cause damage lo one or more cards or to the compu ter itself.
forewarned i s forearmed.
There are three k inds of current from which a card can draw power.
They are iden tified as
n
o +5V bus current
o +12V bus current
o - 12V bus current
Each card w ill draw power from these sources in varying
combinations and in varying amounts, but that in itself w ill not
-
cause a problem. You need to determine the requ irements of each
of your cards, add those numbers together, and verify that the
totals do not exceed the limits. Table C-1 defines those limi ts.

242
Table C-1
Power limits

Type of current Recommended total for all six slots

+5V bus 12.8 amps

+12V bus 1.3 amps

-12V bus 1.0 amps

In order to calculate total power requirements, you'll have to

identify the specifications for your cards. You should be able to find
that information on the package or in the instructions that came
with each card. Once you know how much power is required (and
from which type of current), you can add up the figures and
determine whether your cards as a group may exceed the limits.
For example, assume you have four cards with these requirements:
o +5V bus 8 amps total for four cards
o +12V bus .7 amps total for four cards
o -12Vbus .632 amps total for four cards
These totals are all within the limits, and you can safely install all
four cards. However, if you should purchase two more cards, you
will have to add in their requirements to be sure that the totals are
still acceptable.

Appendix C: Expansion Cards and Power Requirements 243

Menubar
Menu title-:" .: " .: " .: " .: " .: " .: " .: " .: " .: " .: " .: " .: " .: " .: " .: -:-:-.: -.: -.: -~~~~=1~~~.:.:..::....__:.;-
.: 7t~~f;;;~~~~~n--~~~~~--:~l
Pull-down menu ________...,.,,__...,.,_ _..
Dimmed command _______.....,_ _ _._
System Icon __________
Commands - - - - - - - - -....,._...,.,
- - _ __.

Highlighted command ------b~:-..J.~m:DlmJt:'.~

Pointer
Apple-key equivalent ------+-----:=~==~~~

Close box - -- - - - - - - - -io-'"!'

Active window's title bar - - - - - - - 3 OK n dlS~
-
Zoom box - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - J
Directory window - - - - - - - - / -?l
Application Icon - - - - - - - - -..i--. ,, ......
I-beam pointer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Document Icon. selected _____.....,___._.._ _
Folder I con -----------~-
Selected text _________.....,_ _ _ _ __
Scroll bar ___________.,.:..;.....__ _............ ~·-r--:r~r""'

Scroll box - - - - - - - - - - - -- -- - - - - - - -
Scroll arrow ---------------------L~~----------"'
Size box - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - " " '
Disk Icon - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - " " '
Trash ------------~-----------------------...l.'.!.~r..,,
n
Desktop - - - - - - - - - - -L _

Dialog box -----------1' l Pl eil\ e name t111s dr sk :

[urork Startup D
Insertion point - - - - - - - - ---1.- - -...,:;;=====-/
DK 11
J
Button ------------;!:;:;;:;;;;:::::::;;;:;~
~;,,,,,,,
~ =======-==--=~====:::L

ii
244
 Glossary

active window: The frontmost window on the desktop; the window

where the next action will take place. An active window's title bar is
highlighted.
r Alarm Clock: A desk accessory that displays the curre nt date and
time.
Apple DeskTop Bus: The set of connectors on the back of the mai n
unit that you use to attach the keyboard, mouse, and other Apple

- DeskTo p Bus devices (such as ha nd graphics tablets, hand controls,

and specialized keyboards).

- Apple key: A key that, when held down while another key is pressed
or a mouse action is performed, causes a command to take effect.
Sometimes called the command key.
Apple menu: The menu on the far left in the menu bar. Its title is
an Apple symbol.
application program: A tool to mani pulate information and help
you perform your work. Sometimes called an application or a
program.
attributes: Information associated with text you type. Text
attributes include the size and style as well as the font you choose.
bridge: A device that lets you connect ApplcTalk networks together.
See also zone.
button: The places in dialog boxes where you click to designate,
confirm, or cancel an action. See also mouse button.
Calculator: A desk accessory that works like a four-fu nction pocket
calculator. You can cut and paste calculation results into you r
documents.
Li§:~ Cancel button: A button that appears in dialog boxes. Clicking this
buuon cancels the command.

245
 caps Lock key: A key that, when engaged, causes subsequently
typed letters to appear in uppercase. It works like a Shift key except
that it doesn't affect numbers or symbols.
character keys: The keys on the Macintosh II keyboard for letters,
numbers, symbols, punctuation, Return, Tab, and the Space bar.
check box: The small box or circle associated with an option in a
dialog box that, when clicked, adds or removes the option.
choose: To pick a command by dragging through a menu. Usually
you do this after you've selected something for the computer to act
on.
Chooser: A desk accessory that lets you configure your Macintosh II
system to print on any printer for which there's a printing resource
on the current startup disk. If you're part of an AppleTalk network,
you use the chooser to connect and disconnect from the network
and to choose among devices connected to the network. You can
also specify a user name that the Macintosh II shows when you're
using a network resource-when you're printing on a LaserWriter,
for example.
click: To position the pointer on something, then press and quickly
release the mouse button.
Clipboard: The holding place for what you last cut or copied.
close: To turn a window back into the icon that represents it.
close box: The small white box on the far left side in the title bar of
an active window. Clicking a close box closes the window.
command: A word or phrase, usually in a menu, describing an
action for the computer to perform.
Control Panel: A desk accessory you use to personalize your
computer to your own way of doing things. Use the Control Panel to
change the speaker volume, set the clock, create a RAM cache, and
set many other preferences.
copy protect: To make a disk uncopyable. Software publishers ~
frequently try to copy protect their disks to prevent them from being
illegally duplicated by software users.
current startup disk: The startup disk whose system files the
Macintosh II is currently using. See also startup disk.
cut: To remove something by selecting it and choosing Cut from ~
the Edit menu. What you cut is placed on the Clipboard.

246 Glossary
 daisy chain: A group of devices linked together sequentially. See
also Apple DeskTop Bus.
(---i Delete key: A key that removes the current selection or moves the
I k'.c;r _!
insertion point backward, removing the previously typed character.
desk accessories: "Mini-applications" that are available on the
desktop from the Apple menu regardless of which application
you're using. Examples are the Calculator, Alarm Clock, and
Scrapbook.

- desktop: Macintosh's working environment-the menu bar and the

gray area on the screen.
dialog box: A box containing a message requesting more
information from you. Sometimes the message is a warning that
you're asking your computer to do something it can't do, or that
you're about to destroy some information. In these cases, the
message is often accompanied by an Alert Sound.
dimmed command: A command that appears dimmed in the
menu. You can't choose a dimmed command.
dimmed icon: An icon that represents a disk that has been ejected,
or a document, folder, or application belonging to a disk that has
been ejected. You can select and open dimmed disk or folder
icons, but you can't open the documents and applications on them.
directory: A pictorial, alphabetical, or chronological list of the
contents of a folder or a disk.
directory window: The window that shows you the contents of a
disk.
disk: The magnetic medium on which the computer stores
information. Your computer can use a 3.5-inch disk or a hard disk.
disk drive: The mechanism that holds the disk, retrieves
information from it, and saves information on it. A hard disk drive
has the disk permanently encased. A 3. 5-inch disk drive requires
that you insert a 3. 5-inch disk.
document: Whatever you create with Macintosh II applications-
information you enter, modify, view, or save. See also file.
double-click: To position the pointer where you want an action to
take place, and then press and release the mouse button twice in
quick succession without moving the mouse.

..... Glossary 247

 r-i
I
I

drag: To position the pointer on something, press and hold the

mouse button, move the mouse, and finally release the mouse
button. When you release the mouse button, you either confirm a
selection or move an object to a new location.
driver: See resource.
Enter key: A key that confirms or terminates an entry or
encer (sometimes) a command.
expansion slot: A connector inside the Macintosh H's main unit
that lets you install expansion cards to enhance the computer's
performance.
file: A collection of information stored on a disk-a document, a
system file like the System file or Finder, an application, and so on.
.-,
file server: A combination of controller software and a mass I

storage device that allows computer users to share common files

and applications through a network.
Finder: An application that allows access to documents and other
applications. You use it to manage documents and applications,
and to get information to and from disks.
Find File: A desk accessory that lets you find any folder or file on
the disk. It will also show you where in the hierarchical file system it
found what you wanted

D folder: A holder of documents, applications, or other folders on

the desktop. Folders allow you to organize information in any way
you want
font: A collection of letters, numbers, punctuation marks, and
other typographical symbols with a consistent appearance. An
example of a font is Geneva.
Font/DA Mover: A utility program that lets you add fonts and desk
accessories to your System file. ' '

hard disk: A disk drive that has the disk permanently encased. See
~
also disk drive. I

hard disk installer: A utility program that lets you initialize your
hard disk, update your disk when you get new hard disk resources,
and do maintenance testing. The hard disk installer is identified by
the Apple HD SC Setup icon in the Utilities Folder.
hardware: Anything about the computer that you can see or touch.

,-, I

248 Glossary
 hierarchical file system: A way of using folders to organize
documents, applications, and other folders on a disk to organize
and look at related information. Folders (analogous to
subdirectories in other systems) can be nested in other folders to
create as many levels of a hierarchy as you need. Opening a folder
presents only the information you've put into that folder, so you
can concentrate on that information without viewing everything on
the disk.
highlight: To make something visually distinct from its
background, usually to show that it has been selected or chosen.
I I-beam: A type of pointer used in entering and editing text.
icon: A graphic representation of an object, a concept, or a
message. Icons are often objects associated with the Finder.
information window: The window that appears when you select an
icon and choose Get Info from the File menu. It supplies
information such as size, type, and date, and it includes a place for
adding notes.
initialize: To prepare a disk to receive information. You can
initialize SOOK disks on both sides or on just one side.
insertion point: The spot in a document where something will be
added. You select an insertion point by clicking. It's represented by
a blinking vertical bar.
Installer: A utility program that lets you choose an Installation
script for updating your system software.
kilobyte (K): A unit of measurement consisting of 1024 (210) bytes.
In this usage, kilo (from the Greek, meaning a thousand) stands for
1024. Thus 64K memory equals 65,536 bytes. See also megabyte.
local area network (IAN): A group of computers linked physically
by a network of communication cables.
lock: To prevent documents from being edited, discarded, or
renamed, or to prevent entire disks from being altered.
main unit: The computer console, which contains the processor,
co-processor, memory, the built-in disk drive(s), and an optional
SCSI hard disk.
megabyte (MB): A unit of measurement equal to 1024 kilobytes, or
1, 048, 576 bytes. See also kilobyte.

Glossary 249
 ~
I

memory: The place in the computer's main unit that stores

information while you're working with it. The Macintosh II includes
at least lMB of memory you can use for your work, and at least 256K
of ROM (read-only memory) that stores certain system information
permanently. See also random-access memory and read-only
memory.
menu: A list of commands that appears when you point to and
press the menu title in the menu bar. Dragging through the menu
and releasing the mouse button while a command is highlighted
chooses that command.
menu bar: The horizontal strip at the top of the screen that
contains menu titles.
menu title: A word or phrase in the menu bar that designates one
menu. Pressing on the menu title causes the title to be highlighted
and its menu to appear below it
mouse: The small device you roll around on a flat surface next to
your computer. When you move the mouse, the pointer on the
screen moves correspondingly.
mouse button: The button on the top of the mouse. In general,
pressing the mouse button initiates action wherever the cursor is
pointed or inserted. Releasing it confirms the action.
nest: To place folders inside other folders. See hierarchical file
system.
numeric keys: Keys on the right side of the keyboard that let you
do numeric entry and calculation quickly. Sometimes called a 1 O-
key pad.
open: To create a window from an icon so you can view a document
or directory.
option card: A card that contains electronic circuits that
...,
( !

implement specialized functions. Option cards are installed by

your dealer. Some examples are co-processors and accelerators.
See expansion slot.
Option key: A key used like the Shift key to give an alternate
interpretation to another key you type. You use it to type foreign
characters or special symbols.
paste: To put a copy of the contents of the Clipboard-whatever
was last cut or copied-at the insertion point. ~
I

~
I

250 Glossary .-.

• I
- peripheral device: A piece of computer hardware-such as a disk
drive, printer, or modem-used in conjunction with a computer
and under the computer's control. Peripheral devices are usually
physically separate from the computer and connected to it by wires
or cables.
pointer: A small shape on the screen, most often an arrow pointing
up and to the left, that follows the movement of the mouse.
port: A socket on the back panel of the computer where you can
plug in a cable to connect a peripheral device, another computer,

- or a network.
Power On key: A key at the top of the keyboard used to turn on the
Macintosh II.
power switch: A switch located on the back of the main unit that
you can use to turn off the computer when the Shut Down command
is not available for some reason. This switch should not be used in
the normal course of events.
press: To position the pointer on something and then hold down
the mouse button without moving the mouse.
printing resource: A system file that lets you print on a
corresponding printer attached to the computer. Sometimes called
a printer driver.

RAM: See random-access memory.

RAM cache: RAM you can designate to store certain information an
application uses repeatedly. Using the RAM cache can greatly speed
your work, but may need to be used sparingly or not at all with
applications that require large amounts of memory. You set the
RAM cache in the Control Panel.

random-access memory (RAM): The part of the computer

memory that stores information temporarily while you 're working
on it. RAM can contain both application programs and your own
information. Information in RAM is temporary, gone forever if you
switch the power off. An exception to this is a small amount of
memory used to save settings, such as the Alarm Clock and Speaker
Volume, that's powered by battery when your computer is switched
off. Compare read-only memory.
Read Me documents: Documents (included on application and
system software disks) that provide you with late-breaking
information about the product. You'll usually find Read Me
documents in the Update Folder on the disk.

Glossary 251
 read-only memory (ROM): The part of memory that contains
information the computer uses (along with system files) throughout
the system, including the information it needs to get itself started. I~
Information in ROM is permanent; it doesn't vanish when you
switch the power off. The Macintosh II contains at least 256K of
ROM. Compare random-access memory.
resource: A file in a System Folder that tells the computer how to
work with a device. Sometimes called a driver.
[ Return key: A key that makes the insertion point move to the
beginning of the next line. It's sometimes used to confirm or
[return _ terminate an entry or a command.
ROM: See read-only memory.
save: To store information on a disk.
Scrapbook: A desk accessory in which you save frequently used
pictures and text.
scroll: To move a document or directory in its window so that you
can see a different part of it. You can also scroll the directory in
some dialog boxes.
scroll arrow: The arrow on either end of a scroll bar. Clicking a
scroll arrow moves the document or dire(:tory one line. Pressing a
scroll arrow scrolls the document continuously.
scroll bar: A rectangular bar that may be along the right or bottom
of a window. Clicking or dragging in the scroll bar causes the view of ~
the document to change.
scroll box: The white box in a scroll bar. The position of the scroll
box in the scroll bar indicates the position of what's in the window
relative to the entire document.
SCSI: An acronym for Small Computer System Interface;
pronounced "skuh'zee.''
SCSI port: The port on the back of the main unit to which you
connect SCSI devices. See Small Computer System Interface.
select: To designate where the next action will take place. To select,
you click or drag across information.
selection: The information (including, but not limited to, the
insertion point) affected by the next command. The selection is
usually highlighted.
serial interface: An interface in which information is transmitted
sequentially, a bit at a time, over a single wire or channel.

252 Glossary
-
 serial port: The connector on the back of the main unit for devices
that use a serial interface.
Shift-click: A technique that allows you to extend or shorten a
selection by holding down the Shift key while you select (or
deselect) something related to the current selection.
Shift key: A key that, when pressed, causes subsequently typed
letters to appear in uppercase and causes the upper symbol to
appear when number or symbol keys are typed.

... size box: A box on the bottom-right corner of most active windows
that lets you resize the window. See also zoom box.
Small Computer System Interface (SCSI): An industry
standard interface that provides high-speed access to peripheral
devices.
software: Instructions for the computer to carry out. The computer
reads these instructions from disks inserted into the disk drive or
from a hard disk.
startup disk: A disk that contains the system files the computer
needs to get itself started. A startup disk must have at least a Finder
and a System file. It may also contain files such as printing
resources, Scrapbook, and Clipboard. Most people who have a
hard disk use it as the startup disk.
style: A stylistic variation of a font, such as italic, underline,
shadow, or outline.
system file: A file the computer uses to start itself up or to provide
system-wide information. Although system files are represented by
icons just as documents and applications are, they can't be opened
in the usual way. You can, however, alter the contents of system
files. For example, you can use the Font/DA Mover to change the
contents of the System file or change the contents of the Scrapbook
or Note Pad files by using those desk accessories. See also startup
disk.
system software: The set of files and resources in the System
Folder that the computer uses to run itself.
System Tools disk: A disk that comes packed with the Macintosh
II. The System Tools disk contains important utilities you can use to
maintain and update your computer system and application disks.
Tab key: A key that, when pressed, moves the insertion point to the
1.'·•_ next tab marker or, in a dialog box with more than one place to
enter information, to the next text box.

Glossary 253
 TeachText: An application on the System Tools disk that lets you
read Read Me documents. ,...,
terminator: A device that fits between a SCSI cable and a SCSI \

device, or between two SCSI connectors in a SCSI chain. Sometimes

these are built inside a SCSI device. There should be no more than
two terminators in a SCSI chain-one at the start of the chain, and
one at the end.
text box: The places in any dialog box where you can type
....I

information.
title bar: The horizontal bar at the top of a window that shows the
name of the window's contents and lets you move the window.
Trash: An icon on the desktop that you use to discard documents,

I folders, and applications.

Update Folder: A folder on the System Tools disk, and on other
application and system disks, that contains Read Me documents.
utility program: A special-purpose application that alters a system
file or lets you perform some useful function related to a system file.
Examples are the Font/DA Mover and the Installer.
window: The area that displays information on the desktop. You
view documents through a window. You can open or close a
window, move it around on the desktop, and sometimes change its
size, edit its contents, and scroll through it.
word wraparound: The automatic continuation of text from the ~
end of one line to the beginning of the next. Word wraparound lets
you avoid pressing the Return key at the end of each line as you type.
wristwatch: The cursor icon that you see on the screen when the
computer is performing an action for which you have to wait.
zone: A network in a series of interconnected networks, joined _.,
through bridges.
zoom box: The small box on the right side of the title bar of some
windows. Clicking the zoom box expands a window to its maximum
size. Clicking it again returns the window to its original size. See also
size box.

!-i

254 Glossary
 Index

A Apple me nu 76, 95, 162-170, 180 naming 117, 154-155

Aboul command (Apple me nu) 77, Aboul command 77, 180 recovering 120
180 Alarm Clock 76, 163 removing 120
accenLed characlers 149-150. See Calculator 164 renaming 117
also Key Caps Chooser 96-97, 122, 16'i- 165 s tarling 48-49
acLivaLing w indows 40-42, 86 Control Pane l 98-106 Lroubleshooting 222
Aclive bullon (Chooser) 96 Find File 107- 110, 167 unlocking 121
aclive w indow 40-42 Key Caps 149, 168 arranging work o n disks 158-159

- prinLing (with ImageWriter) 123,

adding
192

desk accessories 95
images to Scrapbook 111
Note Pad 169
Scrapbook 111- 112, 169-170
Apple-period (cancel command)
150, 191
Apple Personal Modem 206
arrow keys 147
arrow pointer. See pointer
assembling the system 6-19
attribules 161

air vents. See ventilation AppleShare 20 1

alarm, selling. See Alarm Clock Apple-Sh fft-1 (eject disk) 191 8
Alarm Clock (Apple me nu) 76, 163 Apple-Sh ift-2 (eject disk) 19 1 backup copies 118-119, 138, 233
Alcrl Sou nd 50, 100, 106, 162 Apple-Sh ift-3 (dump screen) 191 ballery, clock 217
alig ning monito rs 104 Apple-Shift-Ii (print active window) blinking
AppleCare 2 17-2 18 123, 192 insertion poinl, selling rate of 98
AppleColor High-ResoluLion RGB AppleTalk ImageWriter printing m enu , selling 99
Monilor 102-104, 166, resource 165 blinking question mark icon 23, 27
206-207 AppleTalk option bli nk ing vertical bar 49
Apple OeskTop Bus 16-17 (ImageWriter) 205 bomb icon 219
Apple OcskTop Bus connectors 4, AppleTal k Personal NeLwork 204 brightness control 2'i , 218
16-17 Chooser and 96-97, 165 bus. See Apple Des kTop Ilus
Apple Developer Services 208 zones a nd 97, 165 By Date command (View
Apple-E (eject disk) 136 application dis ks 48 menu) 187
Apple Extended Keyboard 3, 208, updaLing 77- 78 By Icon command (View
2'i 1 applicaLio ns 22, 172, 196-202. See menu) 73, 186
Apple HO SC Selup 227- 231 also specific application By Kind command (View
Apple High-ResoluLion Monochrome copying 11 8-119 me nu) 187
Mon itor 102-104, 166, dragging icons for 179 By Name command (View
206-207 locking 121 me nu) 73, 187
Apple key 150, 158 managing documents By Size command (View
s hortculs w ith 191-192, 193 wilhin 127-132 menu) 187
Apple Keyboard 3, 24 1 MiniFinder and 125-1 26 Ily Small Icon command (View
Apple key equivalenls 150, moving 11 6, 11 9 me nu) 186
191-192

255
c Close command (File menu) 44, Set Startup 189
cables 87, 127, 128, 182, 192 Show Clipboard 185
keyboard 2, 15-17 closing windows 44-45, 87 Shut Down 4, 136, 189, 233
mouse 15 Color button (Monitors, Control Undo 185
SCSI 234-238 Panel) 102, 103 Use MiniFinder 125-126, 189
video 2, 12-13 color monitors 102-104, 166, comment box. See Get Info
Calculator (Apple menu) 164 206-207 command
canceling a drag 33, 35, 40, 85 Command key. See Apple key communications software 198
Caps Lock-Apple-Shift-4 (print command(s) connecting
screen) 123, 192 About 77, 180 AppleTalk Personal Network 96
Caps Lock key 148 By Date 187 graphics tablet 16-17
cards. See expansion cards or By Icon 73, 186 joystick 16-17
specific card By Kind 187 keyboard 14-17
care By Name 73, 187 main unit power cord 6-7
of disks 216 By Size 187 monitor 7-14
of hard disk drive 213 By Small Icon 186 monitor power cord 13-14
of keyboard 214 choosing from menus 34-37 mouse 14-17
of main unit 5, 18, 212-213 Clean Up 188, 192 SCSI devices 234-238
of monitor 213 Clear 94, 185 video cable 12-13
of mouse 214-216 Close 44, 87, 127, 128, 182, connector(s)
of screen 213 192 Apple DeskTop Bus 4, 16-17
changing Copy 54-55, 93, 185 keyboard 15-17
Finder view 73 Cut 54-55, 93, 94, 185 SCSI 234-238
window size 37-39, 87 dimmed 35 contrast control 24, 218
character keys. See keyboard Duplicate 118, 183 Control key 148
checking version numbers 77-78 Eject 136, 184 Control Panel (Apple
Chooser (Apple menu) 96-97, Empty Trash 120, 188 menu) 98-106
122, 164-165 Erase Disk 134, 152, 188-189 convergence pattern (Monitors,
choosing. See also Chooser Get Info 72, 78, 121, 182-183 Control Panel), testing 102,
commands from menus 34-37 Move to Desktop 110 103-104
printer 122
startup device 106
cleaning
New 114, 127
New Folder 58-59, 115, 181
Open 35, 114, 128-129,
coprocessor 240
Copy command (Edit menu)
54-55, 93, 185
..,
main unit 6 181-182 copying
mouse 214-216 Page Setup 124, 132, 183 disks 138
screen 6 Paste 55, 93, 185 images from Scrapbook 112
Clean Up command (Special Print 122-123, 132, 182 text 54-55, 93
menu) 188, 192 Print Catalog 124, 183 to different disk 119
Clear command (Edit menu) 94, Put Away 120, 183 to same disk 118
185 Quit 52 copy-protected disks 48
Clear key 151 Restart 136, 189 creating
clicking (mouse technique) 31-32, Save 50-52, 56, 130, 145-146 documents 49-50, 114, 127 _,
84 Save As 56-58, 130-131 folders 58-59, 115 I

Clipboard 54-55, 160-161 Search Here 108 MacPaint documents from

clock battery 217 Select All 90, 120, 185 screen 191
close box 36, 39, 45, 861 87, 190 startup disks 137

256 Index ...

I
 current startup disk 157-15B disconnecting AppleTalk Personal double-cl icking (mouse technique)
desk accessories a nd 95 Network 96 43-44, B4, B5 , 190
switching 157-15B disk(s) 151-159, 172. See also Double-Click Speed, setting 105

-
cursor keys 117 BOOK disks; 400K disks; startup double-sided disks. See BOOK disks
custom izing, s tartup disks 156-157 disks or specific disk dragging ( mouse technique) 32,
Cut command (Ed it menu) 54-55, appl ication 4B, 77-7B B4, B5
93, 94, 1B5 arranging work on 158-159 canceling 33, 35, 40, B5
cutting text 54-55 ca re o f 2 16 d ocuments into folde rs 60-61
copying 13B ico ns 32-33, 60-61, 17B-179
copy-protected 4B selecting by 54, 70-73, 90

-
D draggi ng icons for 179 Drive button (dial og boxe:::) 67
d a isy-chai ning 15-17 ejecting 136, 172-173, 191, Drive button (Apple HD SC
date, setting 99. See also Alarm 193, 22 1 Setup) 23 1
Clock initializing 134-135, 151 - 153 Drive butto n (MiniFinder) 126
Delay Until Repeat, setting 101 locking 153-154 drive r resources. See Install e r
De lete key 49, 94, 151 nam in g 117, 154- 155 dumping screen 19 1
shortcuts with 19 1 renaming 117 Duplicate comma nd (File
desk accessories 76, 95 , 162-170, startup 4B, 77-7B, 95, 137, menu) l l B, IB3
l BO. See also Fonl/DA Mover 139- 140, 155-159, 232
adding 95 troubleshooting 220
Alarm Clock 76, 163 disk d irectory, printing 121 E
Calculator 164 disk drives. See also hard disk e diti ng
Choose r 96- 97, 122, 164-165 drive(s); 3.5-inch disk drive documents 52-55, 56-57
Control Panel 98-106 order of preced ence 157 text in Finder 92-94
Find File 107-110, 167 troubleshooting 220 Edit me nu 1Bli- 1B5
Key Caps 119, 16B documents 22, 172. See also Edit Clear command 91, 1B5
Note Pad 169 menu; icons; text Copy command 54-55, 93, 1B5
re m ov in g 95 copying 11 B-11 9 Cut command 54-55, 93, 91i,
Sc rapbook 111- 112, 169-170 creating 49-50, 114, 127 1B5
des kto p 29, 173 dragging icons fo r 60-61, 179 Paste command 55, 93, 1B5
patte rn, setting 9B editing 52-55 Select All command 90, 120,
troubleshooting 2 19 locking 121 1B5
destination disk. See copying managing w ithin Show Clipboard command 1B5
device prio rity numbe r 157, 23 1 applications 127-132 Undo command 1B5
hard disk drive and 229 memory a nd 145-146 BOOK disk drive. See 3.5-inch disk
d evices, choosing. See Chooser Min iFinder and 125- 126 drive
d iacritica l marks 149- 150. See also m oving 116, 119 BOOK disks 151 , 152-153. See also

- Key Caps
dialog b oxes 50- 5 1, 161- 162
dimmed commands 35
dimmed icon 172
directo ry dialog box 177-17B
na ming 56-57, 117, 131,
151-155
o pe ning 64-67, 114, 12B-129,
145- 1'16
printing 122-123, 132
disk(s)
initia lizing 134-135
Eject button (dialog boxes) 67
Eject button (M iniFinder) 126
Eject command (File me nu) 136,
directo ry w indow 36, 43-44 . See recove ring 120 1B4
also View me nu re movi ng 120 ejecting dis ks 136, 172-173, 191,
printing 12'1 re naming 117, 131 193, 22 1
discharging static e lectricity 8-9 saving 50- 52, 56-5B, 67- 69, Empty Folder 5B-59, 11 5
130-13 1, 11 5-146
u nlocking 121

Index 257
Empty Trash command (Spec ia l files. See ap plicatio ns; docu ments; G
menu) 120, 188. See also system files Gene ral icon (Contro l
Trash icon file server. See Appl eShare Pane l) 98-100
Ente r key 150 Finde r 28, 155- 159, 171 - 179. See Get In fo co mmand (File
sho rtcuts w ith 190 also hie rarch ical fil e system or menu) 72, 78, 121, 182- 183
Erase Disk co mmand (Special specific Finder menu graph ics 197, 200
me nu) 134 , 152, 188-189 checking versio n numbe r o f 77 graphics tablet
e rasing. See Erase Disk command ; MiniFinder and 125- 126 con necting 16-17
in itializing printing documents Control Panel a nd 105
Esc key 148 fro m 122-123 gray scale 102, 103
expand ing me mo ry 207 s ho rtcuts 192-193 gro unded outle ts 3, 5
expans io n cards, installing 8-12 vie w, changing 73 gu ide d to ur. See tra in ing disk
powe r req ui re me nts 24 2-243 Finde r butto n (Min iFind er) 126
ex pans ion cove r shield 9-11 Find File (Apple men u) 107-110,
re moving 10 167. See also hie rarchical file H
expansion s lot cover 4 system happy Macintosh icon 219
re mo ving 10 Find Fil e men u 107-11 0

-
ha rd d isk drive(s) 203, 226-239,
expans io n slots 9-11 Move to Desktop command 110 240. See also Find File;
powe r re qu ire me nts 242-213 Search He re co mma nd 108 hierarch ical file syste m
exte rna l hard disk drive 226 Fine Tune (Mo n ito rs, Control backing up 233
Panel) 104 ca re o f 213
fo ld e r(s) 37, 58-61, 115-11 6, device p rio rity number and 229
F 174-178 . See also Find File; ex terna l 226
fan , tro ub leshooting 221 h ie rarchical file system initializing 227-230
Fi le me nu 34, 18 1- 184
Close command 44, 87, 127,
128, 182, 192
Duplicate command 118, 183
cop y ing 118-119
c reating 58- 59, 115
d ragging fro m o r to 6~ 1 ; 179
e mpty 58-59, 115
organ iz ing files on 233
p recautio ns 233-234
s hutting down 233- 234
as startup d isk 232
-
Eject co mmand 136, 184 moving from o r to 11 6, 119 test ing 231
Get Info command 72, 78 , 121, nami ng 117, 154-155 trou b leshooting 238-239
182- 183 nesting 6 1-64, 115, 175-176

-
updating 230-231
New command 114, 127 recovering 120 hard disk installer. See Apple I-ID
New Folde r com mand 58-59, re moving 120 SC Setu p
11 5, 181 renam ing 59, 117 hardware 141. See also specific
Open command 35, 114, fol der directory, p rinting 124 device
128-129, 18 1- 182 fo lde r icons 36 hie rarchical file system ( HFS)
Page Setup command 124, 132, Font/DA Mover 95, 156- 157 64-69, 152-153, 174- 178.
183 fo nts. See Font/DA Mo ver; Key See also Find File
Print Catalog co mmand 124, 183 Caps initia lizing disks for 134-135
Print command 122-123, 132, fo rmatting d isks. See initializ ing o pe ning docume nts
182 400K disk dr ive. See 3.5-inch d isk th rou gh 64-67
Put Away comma nd 120, 183 drive saving documents
Quit command 52 400K d is ks 152- 153, 156. See also th roug h 67-69
Save As command 56-58, d isk(s) highlig hted icons 32
130-131 initia lizing 134-135 hollow icons 36, 172
Save command 50- 52, 56, 130,
14 5-146

258 Index
 J MacPa int 197
I-beam 30 joystick, connecting 16-17 creating documents from screen
icons 23, 27, 28, 52, 172, 219. with 19 1
See also d ocuments; Edit MacProject 199
menu; text or specific icon K MacTerminal 198
dimmed 172 keyboard 2, 3, 49, 146-151, 208 MacWrile 196-197
d ragging 32-33, 60-61, care of 214 main mon ito r (Monitors, Control
178-179 connecting 14-17 Panel) 104
highlighted 32 Control Panel and 101 main power input receptacle 4, 7
hollow 36, 172 daisy-chaining mouse to 15-17 main unil 2, 4, 144
nami n g 117 specifications 24 1 care of 5, 18, 212-2 13
opening 34-37, 43-44 tro ubleshooting 220 cleaning 6
renaming 59, 117 keyboard cable 2, 15-17 lid 8, 12
selecting 31-32, 70-73, 90-91, keyboard connector 15-17 power cord 2, 6-7, 218
178 Keyboard icon (Control Panel) 101 specifications 240-241
ImageWrite r 205 Key Caps (Apple menu) 149, 168 ventilation o f 5, 212, 221
printing with 122-124, 192 Key Repeat Rate, selling 101 me mory 100, 145-146, 240
ImageWriler p rinting resource 165 documents and 145-146
Inactive button (Chooser) 96 expanding 207
information window. See Get In fo L men us 34. See also specific menu
command LaserWriter 205 blinking, selling 99
Initialize buuon (Apple HD SC printing w ith 122-124 choosing commands from 34-37
Setup) 229 LaserWriler printing resource 165 pulling down 34-35
initializing Le t's Quit button 26 Min if"'inder 125-126. See also
disks 134-135, 15 1- 153 lid (main unit) Pinde r; Use Min iPinder
hard disk urive 227-230 re moving 8 command
installing 125

-
insening lexl 92 replacing 12
insenion po int 49 local area network. See AppleTalk removing 126
blinking, selling rate of 98 Personal Network modems 206
se lecting 53 Locked box (Gel Info) 12 1 monitor(s) 2, 102-104, 206-207,
Installer 77, 139-140, 232 locking 240. See also screen
updating stanup disks applications 121 a lign ing 104
with 139- 140 d isks 153-154 care of 213
installe r, hard d isk. See Apple HD documents 121 color 102-104, 166-167,
SC Setup 206- 207
install ing. See also Installer con necti ng 7-1 4
expansion cards 8-12 M monoch rome 102-104,

- MiniFinder 125 MacDraw 200 166-1 67, 206- 207

resources on stanup Macintosh Programmer's Workshop positioning 104
disks 139-140 (MP\'il) 208 power cord 2, 13-14
Syste m Folde r 137, 232 Macintosh Quick Referen ce Card 2 status, setting 102-104
video card 8-12 Macintosh System Utilities User's troubleshooting 2 18
internal 3.S-inch disk Guide 2 ventilation of 213
drive 202-203 video cable 2, 12-13
1/0 sh ie ld 9

- Index 259
Monitors icon (Control nesting 61-64, 115, 175-176. See pasting text 55
Panel) 102-101, 166- 167 also Find File; hierarchical file peripheral cards/ slots. See
monitor positions (Monitors, Control system expansio n cards; expansion
Panel) 104 netwo rk. See AppleTalk Personal slots or specific card
monitor power input receptacle 13 Network peripheral devices. See specific
mon ito r power o utput receptacle 4, New co mmand (File m enu) 114, device
14 127 plastic hole cover 4
Monochrome button (Monitors, New Folder command ( File removing 10
Control Panel) 102, 103 menu) 58- 59, 115, 181 PMMU (Paged Memory Management
monochrome monito rs 102-104, Nole Pad (Apple menu) 169 Unit) 240
166-167, 206-207 numeric keypad 147. See also poin ter
mouse 2, 29- 33, 84-85 keyboard movin g 30-31
care of 214-216 troubleshooting 220
clean ing 214-216 port(s)
connecting 14- 17 0 SCSI 4, 19, 144, 234-238
Contro l Panel and 105 one-sided format 134- 135, serial 4, 144
daisy-chaining to 152-153. See also disk(s) p os itio n ing monitors 101
keyboard 15-17 Open button (dialog boxes) 65 power 218
specifications 241 Open button (MiniFinder) 126 power cord
troubleshooting 220 Open command (File menu) 35, main unit 2, 6-7, 218
mouse button 29 114, 128-1 29, 181-182. See monitor 2, 13-14
mouse cable 15 also hierarchical file system power icon 13
Mouse icon (Control Panel) 105 opening Power On k ey 4, 23, 27, 148
Mouse Tracking, setting 105 documents 64-67, 114, Power requirements (for expansion
Move to D esktop command (Find 128- 129, 145-146 cards) 242-243
File menu) 110 icons 34-37, 43-44 power strip 3
moving Open Other button power suppl y case 8-9
from or lo folders 116 (Min iFinder) 126 power switch 4, 23
images from Scrapbook 112 Option key 149-150, 158 prepar ing disks. See initializing
pointer 30-31 shortcuts with 192, 193 pressing (mouse technique) 84
text 93 order of precedence (startup Print Catalog command (File
to different disk 11 9 disk) 157 menu) 124, 183
windows 39-40, 86 o rganizing files on hard disk Print command (File
MPW (Macintosh Programmer's drive 233 m en u) 122-123, 132, 182
Workshop) 208 o utlets, grounded 3, 5 printers. See also ImageWriter;
overheating 221 LaserWriter
c hoosing 122
n
N printing 122-1 24
naming 117
p active window (with
appl icatio ns 117, 154-155 packing list 2 ImageWriter) 123, 192
disks 117, 154-155 padlock icon 121 directory window 124
documents 56-57, 117, 131, Paged Memory Management Unit docume nts 122-1 23, 132
154-155 (PMMU) 240 screen (w ith ImageWriter) 123,
folders 117, 154-155 Page Setup comman d (File 192
icons 117 menu) 124, 132, 183 printing resou rces 155, 165. See
Paste command (Edit menu) 55, also Installer
93, 185 installi ng 139-140

260 Index
priority switch number 229 re naming 117 screen 145-146. See also
problems 25-26, 218-222, applications 117 monito r(s)
238-239 disks 117 care of 213
processor 240 documents 117, 131 cleaning 6
programs. See applications fo ld e rs 59, 117 dumping 191
project management 199 icons 59, 11 7 printing (with ImageWriter) 123,
pulling down menus 34- 35 re packing 3 192
Put Away command (File repairs 217-218 troubleshooting 218
me nu) 120, 183 replacing scro ll a rrows 46-47, 88
main unit lid 12 scroll bars 36, 45-47, 86, 88-89
text 93 scroll box 47, 89
Q resources 155, 165. See also scroll ing 88-89
question mark ico n 23, 27, 219 Insta lle r SCSI (Small Computer System
Quit button (Apple HD SC installing 139-140 Interface) devices
Setup) 229-230 Restart butto n (MiniFinder) 126 cables for 234-238
Quit command (File me nu) 52 Restart command (Special connecting 234-238
q uitting TeachText 52 m enu) 136, 189 connectors 234-238
Return key 49, 151 te rminators 234-238
shortcuts with 190 SCSI (Small Compute r System
R RGB monitor. See AppleColo r High- Inte rface) port 4, 19, 144,
RAM (random-access memory) , Resolution RGB Monitor 234-238
expanding 207,240 ROM memory 240 RS-232 devices and 19
RAM Cache, setting 100 RS-232 d evices, SCSI port and 19 Search He re command (Find File
Rate o f Insertion Po int Blinking, Runn ing Man icon (Find File) 109 menu) 108
setti ng 98 Select All command (Edit
Read Me documents 74- 75, menu) 90, 120, 185
170-17 1 s Select box (Chooser) 97
recove ring 120 sad Macintosh icon 219 se lecting (mouse techn ique) 31
registration card 2, 3 safety instructions 5--6 by clicking 31-32
removing. See also Trash icon Save As comma nd (File by d ragging 54, 70-73, 90
applications 120 menu) 56-58, 130-131. See insertion point 53
desk accessories 95 also hierarchical file system by Shift-clicking 73, 91
documents 120 Save button (dialog boxes) 51 text 54, 92
expansion cove r sh ield 10 Save command (File by typing 177- 178, 192
expansion slot cover 10 menu) 50-52, 56, 130, serial numbe rs 3
folders 120 145-146. See also hierarchical serial ports 4, 144
images from Scrapbook 112 fil e system se rvice 217-218
ma in unit lid 8 saving Set Startup command (Special
Minirinder 126 documents 50-52, 56-58, men u) 189
plastic hole cover 10 67--69, 130-131, 14 5-146 setting
System Folder 137 tro ubles hooting 220 Date 99
text 94 scheduling 199 Delay Until Repeat 101
Scrapbook (Apple menu) 111- 112, Desktop Pattern 98
169-170 Double-Click Speed 105
Scrapbook file 111-112, 170 Key Repeat Rate 101
Menu Blinking 99
Monitor Status 102-104

Index 261
setting (continued) starting up 23-26, 27- 29, 48-49 Test button (Apple HD SC
Mouse Tracking 105 TeachText 48-49 Setup) 23 1
RAM Cache 100 training disk 23-26 Test b utton (Monitors, Contro l
Rate of Insertion Point troubleshooting 25-26 Panel) 102, 103- 104
Blinking 98 tutorial 27-29 testing
sound contro ls 100, 106 Startup Device icon (Contro l convergence patte rn (Monitors,
Speaker Volume 100, 106 Panel) 106 Control Panel) 102, 103-104
Startup Device 106 Startup Device, setting 106 hard disk drive 231
Tim e 99 startup d isks 48, 155-159 text. See also documents; Edit
settin g up the system 6-19 creating 137 menu ; icons
Sh ift-clicking (mouse c urrent 157-158 cop ying 54-55, 93
technique) 73, 84, 85, 9 1, cus tomizing 156-157 culling 54-55
190
Shift key 49, 148, 190
desk accessories and 95
hard disk drive as 232
editing 92-94
inserting 92
n
s hortcuts 189- 193 installing resources o n 139-140 moving 93
Finde r 192-193 updati ng 77-78, 139-140 pasting 55
Show Clipboard command (Edit s tatic e lectricity 6-7, 8-9 removing 94
me nu) 185 Stop icon (Find File) 109 replacing 93
Shut Down command (Special stopping train ing disk 26 selecting 54, 92
menu) 4, 136, 189, 233 structured graphics 200 13-inch mo nito r. See AppleColor
s hutting down 4, 7, 26, 233-234 support 217-218 High-Resolutio n RG!3 Monitor
troubleshootin g 22 1 surge protector 3 3.5-inch disk drive 152- 153,
Single In-line Memory Module sw itching current sta rtup 202-203 , 240
(SIMM) 207 disk 157- 158 time, selling 99. See also Alarm
s ingle-sided disks. See 400K disks System file 155-159 Clock
size box 36, 37-39, 86, 87 checking vers ion numbe r title bar 36, 39, 86
slots. See expansion slots of 77-78 training disk 2, 22-23. See also
software 145. See also applicatio ns; system fil es 37, 43, 155-159 TeachText; tutorial
system files installing 232 starting up 23-26
troubleshootin g 222 System fo lder 37, 43, 155- 159 stopping 26
sound contro ls , selling 100, 106 installing 137 Trash icon 29, 120, 174. See also
Sound icon (Control Panel) 100, removing 137 Empty Trash command
106 Syste m Tools d is k 2, 26, 155-159 trou bleshoot ing 25-26, 2 18- 222,
sound jack 4 desk accessories and 95 238-239
source disk. See copying turning on or off 4, 7, 23, 233
Speaker Volume, setting 100, 106 tutorial 22-23. See also TeachText;
specifications 240-241 T training disk
Special me nu 187-189 Tab key 148 starting up 27-29
Clean Up command 188, 192 shortcuts w ith 191 12-inch monito r. See Apple High-
Em pty Trash command 120, TeachText 37, 170-171 Resolulion Mo nochro me
188 quitting 52 Monitor
Erase Disk command 134, 152, Read Me documents and 74-75, two-s ided fo rmat 134-135,
188-1 89 170- 17 1 152-153
Restart comma nd 136, 189 s tart ing 48- 49 typing
Set Sta rtup comma nd 189 te lecommunicatio ns 198, 206 selecting by 177-178, 192
Shut Down command 4, 136, te mpe rature 212, 22 1 troubleshooting 220
189, 233 te rmina to rs, SCSI 234- 238
Use MiniFind er
command 125-126, 189

262 Index
u vertical bar, blinking 49 scroll arrows and 46-47, 88
Undo command (Edit menu) 185 video cabl e 2 scroll bars and 36, 45-47, 86,
unlocking connecting 12-13 88- 89
appl ications 121 video card 2, 102, 103, 207 scroll box and 47, 89
disks 153-154 installing 8-12 scrolling through 88-89
documents 121 p ower requirem ents 242-243 size box and 36, 37-39, 86, 87
unpacking 2-4 video card expansion kit 102, 103, title bar and 36, 39, 86
Update button (Apple HD SC 207 zoom box and 36, 38-39, 86,
Setup) 230-231 video icon 12-1 3 87, 190
Update Folder 37, 74-75, 170-171 v ideo socket 12-13 word processing 196-197
updat ing. See also Insta ller View menu 186- 187 word wraparound 50
appl ication d isks 77-78 13y Date command 187 workstation software 201
hard disk drive 230-231 By Icon command 73, 186 w ristwatch 30
startu p disks 77-78, 139-140 13y Kind com m and 187
Use MiniFinder command (Special By Name comm and 73, 187
By Size command 187 x
menu) 125-126, 189. See also
MiniFinder By Small Icon command 186 X icon 219
User Name box (Chooser) 97 volume (speaker), settin g 100,
Utilities disk 2 106
y
desk accessories and 95
Utilities Folder 37, 44, 227-231 Your Apple Tour of Macintosh 11
utility programs 37, 44
w Applications disk. See training
windows 36-37, 86-87, 159-1 60 disk
activating 40-42, 86 Your Apple Tour of the Macintosh
v active 40-42, 123, 192 II disk. See training d isk
ventilation changing size of 37-39, 87
of main unit 5, 212, 221 close box and 36, 39, 45, 86,
of monitor 213 87, 190 z
version number, checking. See closing 44-45, 87 zones (AppleTalk) 97, 165
About command; Get Info d irectory 36, 43-41 Zones box (Chooser) 97
command moving 39-40, 86 zoom box 36, 38-39, 86, 87, 190

Index 263
 ii. Tell Apple About Your .... . ... . .. . . . . (")
'"C
c

0 Please contact your auchorized Apple dealer w hen you have

crained by Apple Computer and ar e given the resources to h
you need che name o f an auchorized Apple dealer in your ar

0 Would you like to tell Apple w hat you chink about this prod
product, we would like to hear from you . You can help us ~
questionnaire below and marking che appropriate boxes on 1
have more chan one response co a questio n, mark all che bo:
Apple. Include additional pages o f comments if you wish.

I. How would you rate the Macintosh II overall? (1 = poor. . . 6

2 . Where did you purchase your Macintosh II? (1 = dealer, 2 = c
4 = university, 5 =govemment purchase, 6 =Cenified Develor
3. Did you own an Apple computer before buying your Macir
4. How much experience have you had w ith computers? (1 = n
5. Where is your Macintosh II used most often? (1 = work, 2 =I
6. What software applications do you use most often w ich ym
3 =data base, 4 =communicay ons, 5=business graphics, 6 =1
7. What 3.5-inch disk drives do you use wich your Macintosh I
4 = two o r more Apple external, 5=non-Apple external)
8. What type and size o f hard disk drives do you use w ich yo·
4 = 40 MB, 5 =80 MB, 6 = ocher, 7 = shared mass storage)
9. What is the memory configuration o f your Macintosh II? (1
I 0. What monito rs are you using with your Macintosh II? (1 = A
2 = AppleColorrn High-Resolution RGB Monitor, 3 =ocher m
5 = large screen display, 6 = ocher)
1 I . What printer do you use w ich your Macintosh II? (1 =Laser~
4 =ocher dot matrix primer, 5 =daisy w heel printer, 6 =oche
12. What type o f expansion cards are installed in your Macinto:
4 =performance accelerator, 5 = communications or networ~
13. If you are connected to a network, which type is it? (1 = Ap
14. Do you run che UNlX® operating system? (1 = no, 2 =yes)
15. What keyboard are you using w ich your Macintosh II? (1 =Ap
16. What ocher devices do you use w ith your Macintosh II? (1 •
5= other Apple Desl<fo p Busrn input device, 6 =ocher)
17. How would you rate the product training disks overall? (1 =
18 . How would you rate the Macintosh II owner 's guide overal
19 . Please describe any errors or inconsistencies you may have
w ould be helpful.)

- 20 . What suggestions do you have for improving the Macintost

T hanks for your time and effon .

Tuck end flap inside.back
cover when using manual.

_,I
Apple Computer, Inc.
20525 Mariani Avenue
Cupertino, California 95014
(408) 9%-1010 030-3080-A
TIX 171·576 Printed in US.A.